Cop Alfa Giulietta GB:Alfa 159 cop. LUM GB
15-09-2011
15:08
Pagina 1
ENGLISH
OWNER HANDBOOK
Alfa Services
Cop Alfa Giulietta GB:Alfa 159 cop. LUM GB
15-09-2011
15:08
Pagina 2
WHY CHOOSING
GENUINE PARTS
We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.
At Alfa Romeo Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,
offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.
Alfa Romeo workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks
and practical recommendations by our experts.
With Alfa Romeo Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features
of your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.
Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because
they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.
For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones
designed by Alfa Romeo for your car.
SAFETY:
BRAKING SYSTEM
ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,
CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE
COMFORT: SUSPENSION
AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS
PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,
INJECTORS AND BATTERIES
LINEACCESSORI
ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on your purchase and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
We have written this handbook to help you get the most out of your new car.
Please read it all the way through before taking your car on the road for the first time.
Here you will find information, tips and important warnings regarding use of your car and how to achieve the best performance from
the technological features of your Alfa Romeo.
The booklet also provides a description of special features as well as tips and essential information for the correct care and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo and safe driving tips.
Please read the warnings and indications at the bottom; these are marked with the following symbols:
personal safety
car’s wellbeing
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its Customers:
– the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
– the range of additional services available to Alfa Romeo Customers.
We are confident that these instructions will help you become familiar with your new car and the Alfa Romeo after-sales staff who will
be at your service.
Enjoy the read. Happy motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all versions of Alfa Giulietta; please consider only the information
relevant to your version, engine and configuration.
The data in this publication is provided by way of example. Fiat Group Automobiles can modify
the specifications of the model described in this publication at any time, for technical or marketing
purposes. For further information, contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider.
READ THIS CAREFULLY
REFUELLING
K
Petrol engines: refuel with unleaded petrol with an
octane rating (RON) of 95 or higher only.
Diesel engines: refuel with diesel fuel compliant with
European specification EN590 only. The use of other products or
mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently
invalidate the warranty, depending on the damage caused.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Petrol engines : make sure that the handbrake is
engaged, set the gearshift lever to neutral, fully depress the
clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key
to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.
Diesel engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the Y
and m warning lights to turn off; turn the key to AVV and release it
as soon as the engine starts.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
The catalytic converter reaches high temperatures
during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry
leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire
hazard.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The car is fitted with a system that carries out a
continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components
in order to help protect the environment.
ELECTRIC ACCESSORIES
쇵
If after having purchased your car you decide to add
accessories requiring electricity (that may otherwise
cause the battery to gradually lose power), please
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can
calculate the overall electric requirement and check that
the car’s electric system can support the required load
CODE CARD (for versions/markets where provided)
Keep this in a safe place, not in the car. We recommend
that you always carry the electronic code provided on
the CODE card with you, in case you need to perform
an emergency start.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct car maintenance is essential to ensure that the
performance, safety features, environmental
friendliness and low running costs stay in tip-top
condition over the years.
THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS…
... information, tips and important warnings on the
correct use and maintenance of your car over time. Pay
special attention to the symbols " (personal safety)
# (environmental protection) â (car integrity).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
DASHBOARD
The presence and position of the controls, the instruments and the indicators may vary according to the versions.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 1
A0K0074m
1. Fixed vent for sending air to side windows - 2. Adjustable air vent - 3. External light control stalk - 4. Instrument panel 5. Windscreen wiper/rear screen wiper/trip computer stalk - 6. Upper adjustable vents - 7. Radio navigator display (for versions/markets, where
provided) - 8. Hazard lights - 9. Passenger front air bag - 10. Glove box - 11. Central adjustable air vents - 12. Radio (for versions/markets,
where provided) - 13. Heating/ventilation/air conditioning controls - 14. Gear shifting stick - 15. “Alfa DNA” system - 16. Control buttons: fog
lights/rear fog lights, Start&Stop system (for versions/markets, where provided), door lock/unlock, AFS light on/off (for versions/markets, where
provided) -17. Ignition device - 18. Driver’s front air bag - 19. Cruise Control stalk (for versions/markets, where provided) - 20. Headlight alignment corrector (for versions/markets, where provided) and Set Up Menu access button.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
3
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 2
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
VERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
4
Speedometer (speed indicator)
Multifunction display
Rev counter
Fuel gauge with reserve warning light
Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
m c Warning lights present on diesel versions only On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000 rpm
IMPORTANT Instrument panel graphics lighting may vary according to the versions.
A0K0002m
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 3
A0K0001m
VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
A
B
C
D
E
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Speedometer (speed indicator)
Reconfigurable multifunction display
Rev counter
Fuel gauge with reserve warning light
Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
m c Warning lights present on diesel versions only On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000 rpm
IMPORTANT Instrument panel graphics lighting may vary according to the versions.
CONTENTS
5
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SPEEDOMETER (SPEED INDICATOR)
INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING LIGHTS
This shows the speed of the car.
General warnings
REV COUNTER
The warning lights come on in conjunction with a dedicated message and/or a buzzer where appropriate. These indications are
brief and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the
Owner’s Handbook, which you are recommended to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure signal.
This indicates the engine rpm.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE
This shows the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
0 - tank empty.
1 - tank full
The warning light in the gauge lights up when there are only 8 to
10 litres of fuel remaining in the tank; refuel at the earliest opportunity.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. The
warning light on the indicator lights up to indicate an increase in
coolant temperature; in the event of this happening, switch off the
engine and contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider.
x
Low brake fluid level (red)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning
light turns on but should go off after a few seconds.
The warning light (or symbol on the display) comes on
when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the
minimum level due to possible leaks in the circuit.
A specific message will be shown on the display.
Handbrake on (red)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light turns
on but should go off after a few seconds. The warning light (or
symbol on the display) comes on when the handbrake is on. If
the car is moving a buzzer is also triggered.
IMPORTANT If the warning light comes on with the vehicle in motion, check that the handbrake is not engaged.
CONTENTS
6
x
>
>
EBD fault
Warning lights x (red) and > light up at the same
time with the engine running to indicate an EBD system fault or that the system is not available. Early
locking of the rear wheels may occur in the event of
sharp braking, causing the car to swerve. Under these
circumstances drive with extreme caution straight to
the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider
to have the system checked. A specific message appears on the display.
ABS system fault (amber)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning
light turns on but should go off after a few seconds.
The warning light (or symbol on the display) lights up to
indicate a system fault. Under these circumstances, the braking system will work as normal but without the extra performance offered
by the ABS system. Drive with caution and visit an Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service Provider at your earliest convenience. A specific message appears on the display.
d
Brake pads worn (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display) switches on when the front and rear brake pads show signs
of wear; under these circumstances have them replaced as soon as
possible. The display will show the dedicated message.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
7
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
¬
Air bag fault (red)
Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in
the air bag system. A specific message appears on the display.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
8
If the warning light ¬ does not come on when the
key is turned to MAR or if it stays on with the car
in motion (together with the message on the display) there could be a fault in the restraint systems; under these circumstances, the air bags or pretensioners may
not be deployed in the event of an impact or, more rarely,
they could be deployed accidentally. Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services immediately to have the system
checked.
Fault of the warning light ¬ is indicated by the
warning light “ (passenger air bag off) flashing
for longer than the normal 4 seconds. In addition,
the air bag system automatically disables the air bags
on the passenger’s side (both front and side air bags, for
versions/markets, where provided). In this case, warning
light ¬ may not indicate that there is a fault in the restraint systems. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
immediately to have the system checked.
“
Passenger air bag/side bags off
(amber)
The “ warning light comes on when the front passenger’s air bag and side bag are deactivated. With front
passenger air bag on, when the ignition key is turned to MAR,
the “ warning light comes on steadily for several seconds, it flashes for another few seconds and then it should go out.
Fault of the warning light “ is indicated by warning light ¬ coming on. In addition, the air bag system automatically deactivates the air bags on passenger side (both front and side air bags, for versions/
markets, where provided). Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services immediately to have the system checked.
<
Seat belt reminder (red)
(for versions/markets where provided)
The warning light remains on steadily with the car at
stationary and the driver’s seat belt not correctly fastened.
The warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the vehicle
is in motion and the front seat belts are not correctly fastened.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if you wish to permanently
deactivate the S.B.R. (Seat Belt Reminder) system buzzer.
The system can be reactivated using the setup Menu.
w
Low battery charge (red)
(for versions/markets where provided)
The warning light comes on when the ignition key is
turned to MAR, but it should go out as soon as the engine has started (with the engine running at idle speed a brief delay before going out is acceptable).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the warning light (or
symbol on the display) remains only or blinks.
g
Dual Pinion active steering failure
(red) (for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light comes on when the ignition key is
turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds. If the warning light (or symbol on the display) remains on,
you may not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be notably increased; steering is,
however, possible. If this occurs, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services. The display will show a dedicated message.
IMPORTANT The steering system will need to be initialised after disconnecting the battery. A warning light will come on to indicate
this. Simply turn the steering wheel all the way to one end or simply drive on a straight line for a few hundred metres.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
9
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
v
ON CONSTANTLY: Low engine oil pressure (red)
FLASHING: Exhausted engine oil
(for versions/markets, where provided - red)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light
switches on, but it should go out as soon as the engine is started.
1. Low engine oil pressure
The warning light turns on constantly along with a message on the
display (for versions/markets where provided) when the system
detects that engine oil pressure is low.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
10
If the warning light v turns on when the car is
travelling (on some versions, together with the
message on the display), stop the car immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
2. Exhausted engine oil
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light comes on flashing and a specific message will
appear on the display (for versions/markets where provided). The
warning light may flash in the following ways, depending on the
versions:
❍ for 1 minute every two hours;
❍ for three minute cycles with the warning light off for intervals
of five seconds until oil is changed.
After the initial warning, each time the engine is started up, the
warning light will continue to flash in the same ways as described
above, until the oil is changed. A specific message will appear on
the display (for versions/markets where provided) in addition to
the warning light.
Flashing of the warning light is not a fault but indicates that the
oil needs to be changed as a consequence of normal use.
Note that engine oil degrades faster under the following circumstances:
❍ mainly urban use of the car , requiring more frequent regeneration of the DPF;
❍ use of the car for short drives, in which the engine does not
have time to reach its regular operating temperature
❍ repeated interruptions to the regeneration process signalled by
the DPF warning light coming on.
Exhausted engine oil should be replaced as soon
as possible after the warning light comes on, and
never more than 500 km after it first comes on.
Failure to comply with the instructions above may result
in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty. Remember that the operation of this warning light
is not related to the amount of oil in the engine. Therefore, do not simply top up when the light starts flashing.
u
Hot engine coolant (red)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning
light turns on but should go off after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the engine is overheated. A specific message will be shown on the display.
If the warning light comes on, proceed as follows:
❍ when driving normally: stop the car, switch off the engine and
check that the water level in the reservoir is not below the MIN
mark. If it is not, wait for a few minutes for the engine to cool
down then slowly and carefully open the cap, top-up with coolant
and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
Also visually check for leaks. If the warning light comes on again
at the next engine start-up, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
❍ if the car is used under demanding conditions (e.g. towing trailers uphill or fully loaded): slow down and, if the light stays on,
stop the car. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to assist better coolant circulation.
Then switch the engine off. Check correct fluid level as described
above.
IMPORTANT On particularly demanding journeys, it is advisable to
keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off.
´
Door open (red)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display) comes
on when one or more doors or the boot are not perfectly
closed. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and
the car moving. On some versions, the warning light (or symbol
on the display) also lights up when the bonnet is not perfectly
closed.
U
EOBD/injection system fault (amber)
Under normal conditions, the warning light comes on
when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but should
go off as soon as the engine is started.
If the warning light remains on or comes on whilst driving, that
means that the injection system is not working properly; in particular, if the warning light comes on constantly, this indicates a malfunction in the supply/ignition system that could cause excessive
exhaust emissions, a possible loss of performance, poor driveability and high fuel consumption.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
Under these conditions, you can continue travelling at moderate
speed without demanding excessive effort from the engine. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
The warning light goes out after the fault disappears, but the indication is stored in the system.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
11
NOTE (petrol engines only)
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
If the warning light is flashing, this indicates that the catalytic
converter may be damaged.
If the warning light comes on intermittently, release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the warning light
stops flashing; continue the journey at moderate speed, trying to
avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider as soon as possible.
á
VDC system (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning
light turns on but should go off after a few seconds. If
the warning light does not go out, or if it remains lit up when driving, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. A specific message
is displayed on certain versions. The warning light will flash while
driving to indicate that the VDC system is intervening.
ASR fault
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
12
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible if the U warning light does not light up
or if, while travelling, the warning light comes on
either fixed or blinking (in combination with a message
on the display on some versions). The operation of the U
warning light may be checked by traffic police using appropriate equipment. Follow the laws in force in the country where you are driving.
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light turns
on but should go off after a few seconds. If the warning light does
not go out, or if it remains lit up when driving, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. The warning light will flash while driving to indicate that
the ASR system is intervening.
Hill Holder fault
This warning light comes on, on some versions together with the
* symbol and a message in the display, in the event of a Hill Holder system fault. In this case, contact your nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Y
Alfa Romeo CODE fault/
alarm fault (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display) will come
on (on some versions, with a message on the display) to indicate
an Alfa Romeo CODE system or alarm fault(for versions/markets,
where provided): In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Break-in attempt
If this warning light flashes or, on some versions, if the symbol
appears in the display (together with the associated message) this
indicates a break-in attempt. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
m
Glow plug preheating
(diesel versions) (amber)
When the key is turned to MAR, the warning light
comes on and it will go out when glow plugs reach the
preset temperature. THE engine may be started immediately after the warning light goes out.
c
Water in fuel filter
(diesel versions) (amber)
The warning light remains on constantly when driving
(together with a message in the display), to indicate the
presence of water in the diesel fuel filter.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may
cause severe damage to the injection system and
irregular engine operation. If the c warning light
comes on in the instrument panel (together with a message in the display) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to bleed the system. Water may
have entered the tank if this appears immediately after
refuelling: if this happens, switch the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature conditions, the warning
light comes on for a very short time only.
(diesel versions)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The warning light will flash (a message in the display will appear
on the display, on some versions) to indicate a fault in the glow
plugs preheating system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to eliminate the fault.
CONTENTS
Glow plugs preheating fault
13
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
K
Fuel reserve – Limited range (amber)
This warning light comes on when about 8 to 10 litres
of fuel are left in the tank. A warning message will appear on the display (some versions only) when the remaining range less than approximately 50 km (or equivalent in
miles).
SAFETY
If the warning light flashes with the car in motion,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
14
Ü
Cruise Control (green)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light comes on when the key is turned to
MAR, but should go out after a few seconds if the Cruise
Control function is off. The warning light comes on when the Cruise
Control wheel is turned to the ON position (see the “Cruise Control” paragraph in this chapter). A specific message appears on the
display.
h
DPF (particulate trap) cleaning in
progress (diesel versions with DPF
only) (amber)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light
turns on but should go off after a few seconds. The warning light
stays on constantly to notify the driver that the DPF system needs
to eliminate captured pollutants (particulate) by the regeneration
process.
The warning light does not come on during every DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require notification to the driver. The warning light will go off if the car stays in motion until
regeneration has been completed.
The process normally takes about 15 minutes. Optimal conditions
for completing the process are achieved by travelling at 60 km/h
with engine revs above 2000 rpm.
Operation of this warning light does not indicate a fault and the car
does not need to be taken to a workshop. A specific message will
appear on the display when the warning light comes on (for versions/markets where provided).
Always drive at a speed appropriate to the traffic
conditions, the weather and the laws in force. The
engine may be turned off while the DPF light is on;
however, repeated interruption of the regeneration process
may result in premature degradation of the engine oil.
For this reason, it is always advisable to wait for the light
to go off before turning off the engine, following the instructions appearing above. It is not a good idea to complete DPF regeneration with the vehicle stationary.
è
Generic fault (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light turns on in the following circumstances:
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to eliminate the fault.
Exterior lights fault
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
See the section on warning light 6.
Brake lights fault
X
Speed limit exceeded (red)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (for versions/markets where provided) comes on when the speed exceeds 120 km/h.
When the car exceeds the speed limit set in the setup Menu (e.g.
120 km/h), on some versions a message and a symbol are shown
in the display and an acoustic signal is activated.
See description in the “Brake lights fault” section.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Fuel cut-off
This warning light comes on when the fuel cut-off inertia switch is
triggered. A specific message will be shown on the display.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Start&Stop fault
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light comes on when a fault is detected in the
Start&Stop system.
Rain sensor fault
(for versions/markets where provided)
The warning light comes on when a rain sensor fault is detected.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
15
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Parking sensor fault
(for versions/markets where provided)
See the section on warning light t.
4
Rear fog lights (amber)
The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights
are on. The LED over 4 button will also light up.
Rain sensor fault
(for versions/markets where provided)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
This warning light comes on when a dusk sensor fault is detected.
AFS adaptive lights fault
(for versions/markets, where provided)
5
Fog lights (green)
The warning light comes on when the fog lights are
on. The LED over 5 button 5 will also light up.
The warning light comes on when an AFS adaptive light fault is detected (see “AFS adaptive lights” in this chapter). A specific message will be shown on the display.
Side lights (green)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Anti-pinch system fault
The warning light will come on when an anti-pinch system fault
is detected. A specific message will be shown on the display.
3
This warning light comes on when the side lights are
turned on.
Follow me home (green)
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
16
Engine oil pressure sensor fault
The warning light turns on when an engine oil pressure sensor fault
is detected. A specific message will be shown on the display.
The warning light comes on (in combination with a message on
the display) when this device is used (see “Follow me home device” in this chapter).
2
Dipped beam headlights (green)
The warning light comes on when the dipped beam
headlights are on.
Main beam headlights (blue)
1
R
The warning light comes on when the main beam headlights are on.
Left direction indicator (green)
This warning light comes on when the direction indicator stalk is moved downwards or when the hazard
warning light button is pressed.
U
Start&Stop system on/off
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Start&Stop system fault
Turning the Start&Stop system on
A message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop system
is on. The LED on the T button on control panel in the dashboard
(see “Start&Stop system” in this chapter) is off.
Turning the Start&Stop off
❍ Versions with multifunction display: a message will appear on
the display when the Start&Stop system is off.
❍ Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: The T symbol and a message will appear on the display when the
Start&Stop system is off.
The LED on the T button will be on when the system is off.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Start&Stop system fault
E
Right direction indicator (green)
The warning light comes on when the direction indicator stalk is moved upwards or when the hazard warning light button is pressed.
Symbol U (versions with multifunction display) or j (versions
with reconfigurable multifunction display) will flash to indicate a
Start&Stop system fault. For versions/markets, where provided,
a message is also displayed. In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
17
Boot open
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
R
On some versions, a message + symbol on the display are shown when the boot is open.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
18
W
Exterior lights fault
On some versions the display will show a message +
symbol if the fuel cut-off trips. For the fuel cut-off system reactivation procedure see paragraph “Fuel cut-off
system” in this chapter.
Bonnet open
S
√
On some versions, a message + symbol on the display
are shown when the bonnet is open.
Possible presence of ice on the road
On versions equipped with reconfigurable multifunction display, a message + symbol will appear when
the outdoor temperature falls to or below 3°C.
On versions with multifunctional display, only the message is shown.
IMPORTANT In the event of outdoor temperature sensor fault, dashes are shown on the display instead of the value.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
s
Fuel cut-off
On some versions, a message + symbol will appear
on the display if a fault is detected in one of the following lights:
– daytime lights (DRL)
– sidelights/taillights
– direction indicators
– rear fog lights
– number plate lights.
The fault relating to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs,
a blown protection fuse or a break in the electric connection.
T
Brake lights fault
On some versions, a message + symbol will appear on
the display if a brake light fault is detected. The fault may be caused
by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or an interruption of the
electric connection.
1
Rain sensor fault
(for versions/markets where provided)
On some versions, a message + symbol will be shown
on the display if a dusk sensor fault is detected.
u
Rain sensor fault
(for versions/markets where provided)
On some versions, a message + symbol will appear on
the display if a rain sensor fault is detected.
t
Parking sensor fault
(for versions/markets where provided)
On some versions, a message + symbol will be shown
on the display if a parking sensor fault is detected.
Drive mode display (“Alfa DNA” system)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
On versions equipped with a reconfigurable multifunction display,
a message + symbol associated with the selected driving mode “DYNAMIC”, “NORMAL” or “ALL WEATHER” - is shown. A warning message is shown on the display if one of these driving modes
is not available.
On versions equipped with multifunction display, a letter (d or a)
associated with the selected driving mode is shown together with
a dedicated message.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
19
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
DISPLAY
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY “STANDARD”
SCREEN fig. 6
The car may be equipped with a multifunction display/ multifunction reconfigurable display which, in accordance with the settings made, can display useful information when driving.
With the ignition key removed, the display lights up and shows the
time and total odometer reading (in km or miles) for a few seconds when a door is opened/closed.
The following information is shown on the display:
A. Date
B. Odometer (distance covered in km or miles)
C. Driving mode selected using “Alfa DNA” (dynamic control system) (for versions/markets, where provided)
– d = Dynamic
– n = Normal
– a = All Weather
D. Time (always displayed, even with the key extracted and the
front doors closed)
E Start&Stop function indicator (for versions/markets, where
provided)
F. Outside temperature
G Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets where provided)
H. Headlight alignment position (dipped headlamps on only)
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
20
fig. 6
A0K1222g
RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION
“STANDARD” DISPLAY fig. 7
The following information is shown on the display:
A. Time
B. Trip meter (km or miles)
C. Odometer (display of distance travelled in kilometres/miles)
D. State indicator (e.g. doors open, ice on road, etc.)/Start&Stop
function indicator (for versions/markets, where provided)/
Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets, where provided)
E. Headlamp alignment position (only with dipped headlamps
on).
F. Outside temperature
The turbocharger pressure will appear on some versions when
“DYNAMIC” driving mode is selected (see “Alfa DNA system” in
this chapter), fig. 8.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 7
A0K0005m
fig. 8
A0K0006m
21
GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
The GSI system (Gear Shift Indicator) suggests to shift gear by
showing an indication on the control panel (see fig. 9).
Shifting when indicated by GSI will help the driver save fuel.
For fuel-effective driving, select Normal or All Weather mode and
follow the suggestions of the Gear Shift Indicator where possible.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
22
fig. 9
A0K0050m
When the SHIFT UP icon (N SHIFT) appears on the display, the
GSI is suggesting to select a higher gear and when the SHIFT DOWN
(O SHIFT) icon it is suggesting that a lower gear should be selected.
NOTE The indication on the instrument panel stays on until the
driver shifts or until the driving conditions return to a situation in
which shifting is not required to reduce consumption.
WELCOME MOVEMENT
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 10
On some versions, the following occurs when the key is turned to
MAR:
❍ quick movement (up and down) of the speedometer and rpm
gauge;
❍ illumination of graphic symbols/display;
❍ an animated graphic representation of the vehicle profile appears on the display.
Ò ▲: To scroll up the screen and the menu options or increase the
displayed value.
“SET ESC”: Briefly press to access the menu and/or go to the next
screen or confirm your choice. Hold down to go back
to the standard screen.
▼: To scroll down the screen and the menu options or decrease
the displayed value.
Gauge movement
IMPORTANT Buttons “Ò ▲“ and “ ▼“ activate different functions in the following situations:
❍ to scroll the menu options upwards and downwards;
❍ to increase or decrease values during settings.
❍ If the key is removed from the ignition switch whilst the gauges
are moving, they immediately return to their initial position.
❍ Once they have reached the end-of-scale values the gauges rest
on the value indicated by the car.
❍ The movement of the gauges stops when the engine is started.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Illumination of graphic symbols/display
A few seconds after the key is inserted, the gauges, graphic symbols and display light up in sequence.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Graphic animation display
When the key is removed from the ignition switch (with the doors
closed), the display remains lit up and shows a graphic animation.
The display illumination is then dimmed gradually until it goes
out completely.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 10
A0K0094m
23
SETUP MENU
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
24
The menu comprises a series of items which can be selected using the “Ò ▲“ and “ ▼“ buttons to access the different selection and setting operations illustrated in the following paragraphs.
Some items also have a sub-menu.
The menu can be activated by briefly pressing the SET ESC button.
The menu includes the following items:
– MENU
– SPEED BEEP
– HEADLIGHT SENSOR (for versions/markets, where provided)
– RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets where provided)
– ON/TRIP B DATA
– SET TIME
– SET DATE
– FIRST PAGE (for versions/markets where provided)
– SEE RADIO
– AUTOCLOSE
– MEASURES
– LANGUAGE
– ALERTS VOLUME
– BUTTONS VOLUME
– SEAT BELT REMINDER
– SERVICE
– PASSENGER AIR BAG
– DAY LIGHTS
– COURTESY LIGHTS
– MENU EXIT
NOTE Some menu items are shown on the navigator display in models equipped with radio-navigation systems (for versions/markets,
where provided).
Selecting an option from the main
menu without a submenu:
Selecting an option from the main menu with
a submenu:
– briefly press SET ESC to select the main menu option you wish
to set;
– repeatedly press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select the new setting;
– press the SET ESC button to store the new setting and go back
to the previous main menu option.
– press the SET ESC button to display the first submenu option;
– repeatedly press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to scroll through all the submenu options;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to select the displayed submenu
option and open the relevant setup menu;
– repeatedly press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select the new setting
of this submenu item;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to store the new setting and
go back to the previous submenu option.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
25
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
26
MENU ITEMS
Menu
This item is used access the Setup Menu.
Press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select the various menu items.
Hold down the SET ESC button to return to the standard screen.
Speed warning (speed limit)
With this function is possible to set the car speed limit (km/h or
mph); when this limit is exceeded the driver is alerted. To set the
desired speed limit, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the SET ESC button: the display shows the words
Speed Beep;
– press button “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to activate (On) or deactivate
(Off) the speed limit;
– if the function is on, press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select the required speed limit and then press SET ESC to confirm;
IMPORTANT Setting is possible between 30 and 200 km/h, or 20
and 125 mph, according to the previously stored unit. See the
“Measures” paragraph described below. The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time button Ò ▲/ ▼ is
pressed. Hold down Ò ▲/ ▼ button to increase/decrease
the setting rapidly. Complete the setting by repeatedly pressing the
button when you approach the required value.
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button to go back to the standard screen without saving.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the SET ESC button: ON flashes in the display;
– press ▼ button: OFF flashes in the display;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Headlight sensor (Automatic headlight/dusk
sensor sensitivity adjustment)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function is used to turn the headlights on or off according to
external lighting conditions.
The dusk sensor sensitivity can be adjusted according to 3 levels
(level 1= minimum sensitivity, level 2= average sensitivity, level
3= maximum sensitivity); the greater the sensitivity set, the less
the external light variation needed to control turning on the lights
(e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights are expected
to come on in relation to levels1 and 2).
Proceed as follows to set:
– briefly press SET ESC: the previously set brightness level flashes in the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Rain sensor (sensitivity adjustment)
(for versions/markets where provided)
This function is used to adjust the rain sensor sensitivity to four
levels.
To set the required sensitivity level, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button: the previously set sensitivity level
will flash on the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to select;
– press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or
hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without
saving.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
27
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
28
On/Trip B data (trip B on)
Set time (Clock)
With this function is possible to turn the Trip B display (trip meter) on and off. For more information see the “Trip computer” paragraph.
For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the SET ESC button again: the display flashes On
or Off depending on what was previously set;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
With this function is possible to set the clock through two submenus: “Time” and “Format”.
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button: the display shows the two submenus “Time” and “Format”;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to go from one submenu to the next;
– once you have selected a submenu, briefly press SET ESC;
- when accessing the “Time” submenu: brefly pressing SET ESC
button: the minutes flash in the “time” mode;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to select;
– brefly press SET ESC button: “the minutes” flash in the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to select.
IMPORTANT The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ is pressed. Hold the button down to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Complete the setting by repeatedly pressing the button when you approach the required setting.
– when accessing the “Format” submenu: briefly press button
SET ESC: the previously set display format will flash on the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select the “24h” or “12h” mode.
When you have made the required adjustments, briefly press SET
ESC button to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button
down to go back to the main menu screen without saving.
– press SET ESC button again to go back to the standard screen
or main menu, depending on which point in the menu you have
reached.
Set date
With this function is possible to change the date (day - month year).
To update, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button: the “year” flashes on the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ button to select;
– briefly press SET ESC: the “month” flashes on the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press SET ESC: the “day” flashes on the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ button to select.
IMPORTANT The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ button is pressed. Hold the button down
to increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automatically. Complete the setting by single pressing the button when you approach
the required value.
– press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or
hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without
saving.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
29
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
30
First page (information display on home page)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function is used to choose the information you would like to
see on the main screen. You can view the date or the trip meter.
To make your choice, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button: “First page” will appear on the display;
– briefly press SET ESC button again to show the display options:
“Date” and “Engine info”;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ button to select the information you
wish to see on the main page of the display;
– briefly press SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or
hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without
saving.
When the key is turned to MAR and the initial check stage is over,
the display will show the information selected via the “First page”
menu function.
See radio (audio information display)
This function is used to shows information relating to the car radio on the display.
– Radio: selected radio station frequency or RDS message, automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore;
– Audio CD, MP3 CDs: track number;
– CD Changer: CD number and track number;
To show the car radio information on the display (on) or not (off),
proceed as follows:
– briefly press the SET ESC button: the display flashes On or Off
depending on the previous setting;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Autoclose (Automatic door lock operation
with car running)
When activated (on), this function automatically locks the doors
when the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
– briefly press the SET ESC button to display a submenu;
– briefly press the SET ESC button again: the display flashes On
or Off depending on what was previously set;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ button to select;
– briefly press SET ESC button to go back to the submenu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the main menu without
saving.
– hold down SET ESC again to go back to the standard screen or
main menu, depending on which point in the menu you have
reached.
Measures (Setting the unit of measurement)
With this function is possible to set the unit of measurement in
three submenus: “Distance”, “Consumption” and “Temperature”.
To set the desired unit, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button to display the three submenus;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ button to go from one of the three submenus to the next;
– once you have selected a submenu, briefly press SET ESC button;
– if the submenu “Distances” is entered: by briefly pressing SET
ESC the display shows “km” or “mi” depending on the previous
setting;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ button to select;
– if the “Consumption” submenu is entered: by briefly pressing
SET ESC button the display shows “km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg”
depending on the previous setting.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
31
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
32
If the distance unit set is “km”, you can set the fuel consumption
unit (km/l or l/100) to show the amount of fuel consumed.
If the distance unit is set to mi, fuel consumption is displayed in
“mpg”.
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
– if the “Temperature” submenu is entered: by briefly pressing
SET ESC button the dispaly shows °C or °F depending on the previous setting;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
When you have made the required adjustments, press SET ESC
button to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button down
to go back to the main menu screen without saving.
– hold down SET ESC button again to go back to the standard
screen or main menu, depending on which point in the menu you
have reached.
Language (Selecting the language)
Display messages can be shown in different languages: Italian,
English, German, Portuguese, Spanish, French, Dutch, Turkish and
Brazilian Portuguese.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button: the previously set language flashes in the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Warnings volume (Adjusting the
alert/warning acoustic signal volume)
With this function is possible to adjust (to eight levels) the volume of the acoustic signal which sounds in the event of alerts and
warning.
To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:
– briefly press SET ESC button: the previously set volume level
flashes in the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or“ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Button volume (Button volume adjustment)
Service (Service schedule)
With this function it is possible to adjust (to eight levels) the volume of the acoustic signal sounding when the MENU SET button
is long pressed to exit a sub-menu and return to the standard menu.
To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the SET ESC button: the previously set volume level will be displayed;
– press the button “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to adjust the volume; an
acoustic signal equal to the volume level being selected is sounded during this adjustment;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the previous screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
On versions with reconfigurable multifunction display, the volume
level is represented by bars.
With this function is possible to view information on servicing deadlines depending on kilometres travelled or daily intervals. The Service function also shows the interval (in kilometres or miles) before the next engine oil change is due.
This information can be consulted as follows:
– briefly press the SET ESC button, which makes the display show
the service interval in km or mi according to the previous setting
(see “Distance measures” paragraph); press the SET ESC button
to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen.
Belt reminder (Buzzer/reactivation for S.B.R.
signally) (for versions/markets, where provided)
This function will only be displayed after the S.B.R. system
has been deactivated by an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider
(see “S.B.R. system” in chapter 2).
IMPORTANT According to the “Planned Maintenance Programme”,
the car must be serviced every 30,000 km (1.4 petrol versions)
or 35,000 km (1750 Turbo petrol and diesel versions). This message is displayed automatically when the key is turned to MAR,
from 2,000 km (or equivalent value in miles) when the next service is due and is displayed again every 200 km (or equivalent
value in miles). Below 200 km the signals become more frequent.
The indication will appear in kilometres or miles depending on
the unit of measurement settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to MAR, the word Service will appear on the display, followed by the number of kilometres or miles left. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services where
the “Planned Maintenance Programme” operations will be performed and the message will be reset.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
33
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
34
Front passenger air bag and side bag
(Chest/pelvis protection)
Activation/Deactivation
This function is used to activate/deactivate the passenger air bag.
Proceed as follows:
– press SET ESC and, after the message Bag pass: Off (to deactivate) or Bag pass On (to activate) is displayed by pressing
“Ò ▲“ buttons and “ ▼“ , press SET ESC again;
– the confirmation request message appears in the display;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select Yes (confirming activation/deactivation) or No (to cancel);
– briefly press SET ESC button to confirm the setting and go back
to the menu screen or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Day Lights (DRL)
With this function is possible to turn the day lights on and off.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
– briefly press the SET ESC button to display a submenu;
– briefly press the SET ESC button again: the display flashes On
or Off depending on what was previously set;
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ button to select;
– briefly press SET ESC button to go back to the submenu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the main menu without
saving.
– hold down SET ESC button again to go back to the standard
screen or main menu, depending on which point in the menu you
have reached.
Courtesy lights
(courtesy lights activation/desactivation)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
With this function is possible to turn on the side lights, the number plate lights and the ceiling lights for approximately 25 seconds
when the doors or boot are opened using the remote control, with
the following exceptions:
❍ interruption after 5 seconds after closing a door
❍ interruption after locking operation using the remote control
❍ interruption following any operation using the remote control
Proceed as follows to turn the function on/off:
– briefly press SET ESC button: “On” or “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous setting);
– press “Ò ▲“ or “ ▼“ to select;
– briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving.
Exit menu
This function closes the settings listed on the menu screen. Briefly
press SET ESC button to go back to the standard screen without
saving. Briefly pressing ▼ button the display will go back to the
first menu item.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
35
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
TRIP COMPUTER
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Trip Computer displays information on car operation when
the key is turned to MAR. This function is composed by separate
trips, called “Trip A” and “Trip B” which can monitor the entire mission (journey) in a reciprocally independent manner.
Both trips can be reset (start of a new journey).
“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to:
STARTING
AND DRIVING
– Autonomy
– Distance travelled
– Average consumption
IN AN
EMERGENCY
– Current consumption
– Average speed
– Travel time (driving time). With the function
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
36
“Trip B” is possible to display the figures relating to:
– Distance travelled B
– Average consumption B
– Average speed B
– Journey time B (driving time).
“Trip B” may be turned off (see “Trip B on” paragraph). “Range”
and “Instant consumption” parameters cannot be reset.
Values displayed
Autonomy
This indicates the approximate distance which can be travelled with
the present amount of fuel in the tank.
The display will show the reading “- - - -“ when the following events
take place:
– range is lower than 50 km (or 30 mi)
– car left parked with engine running for a long time.
IMPORTANT The autonomy value variation can be affected by several factors: driving style, type of route (motorway, towns and
cities, mountain roads, etc.), conditions of use (load, tyre pressures, etc.). Take these factors into account when planning a trip.
Distance travelled
This shows the distance covered from the start of the new journey.
Average consumption
This value is the approximate average fuel consumption from the
start of the new journey.
Current consumption
This indicates fuel consumption. The value is constantly updated.
The message “- - - -” will appear on the display if the car is parked
with the engine running.
Average speed
This value shows the average speed based on the overall time elapsed
since the start of the new journey.
Journey time
Time elapsed since the start of the new journey.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
37
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Displayed information
The icons relating to the various parameters are the following:
The following information is shown each time a value is displayed:
❍ animated icon in the upper part of the display (A-fig. 11);
❍ word “Trip” (or “Trip A” or “Trip B”) (B);
❍ name, value and unit of measure of the selected parameter
(e.g. “Range 1500km”) (C).
7EK
”Autonomy”;
o6
“Average fuel consumption A” (if Trip A is active,
or “B” if Trip B is active);
After a few seconds the name and value of the selected parameter are replaced by an icon (see fig. 12).
oq
“Current consumption”;
86
“Average speed A” (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip
B is active);
56
“Trip time A” (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B is
active);
STARTING
AND DRIVING
p E 7 6 “Distance A” (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B is
active);
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
38
fig. 11
A0K1223g
fig. 12
A0K0007m
TRIP button 0.00
New journey
This is located on the right stalk (fig. 13). With the ignition key
turned to MAR, this button displays the values described above and
resets then before a new mission:
– short press: values display;
– long press: values reset and start of a new mission.
It begins after a new reset is made:
– “manual” resetting by the user, by pressing the relevant button;
– “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip distance” reaches
99999.9 km or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999
hours and 59 minutes);
– after each disconnection and subsequent reconnection of the battery.
IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip A” details are being
displayed resets the information associated with this function only.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip B” details are being
displayed resets the information associated with this function only.
Start trip procedure
With ignition key turned to MAR, carry out the reset operation by
pressing and holding down the TRIP 0.00 button for longer than
2 seconds.
Exit Trip
You can automatically exit the TRIP function once all the values
have been displayed, or by holding the MENU ESC button down
for more than 1 second.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 13
A0K0096m
39
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
40
SYMBOLS
ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
Some components of the car have coloured labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Under the bonnet there is also a label that summarises all
the symbols.
This is an electronic engine locking system which increases protection against attempted thefts of the car. It is automatically activated when the ignition key is extracted.
Each key contains an electronic device which modulates the signal emitted during ignition by an antenna built into the ignition device. This signal is the ‘password’ which changes at each ignition
and which the control unit uses to recognise the key and enable
ignition.
OPERATION
The Alfa Romeo CODE system control unit sends an acknowledgement code to the engine management control unit to deactivate the inhibitor each time the car is started by turning the ignition key to MAR.
The code is sent only if the Alfa Romeo CODE system control unit
has recognised the code transmitted from the key.
Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Alfa Romeo
CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine management
control unit. Warning light Y lights up on the instrument panel
if the code is not correctly recognised during ignition.
In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to MAR; if it is still
locked, try again with the other keys that come with the car. If you
are still unable to start the engine contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
Warning light Y comes on when driving
❍ If the warning light Y turns on, this means that the system
is running a self-test (due for example to a voltage drop).
❍ Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the Y warning light
stays on.
KEYS
CODE CARD (for versions/markets, where provided)
A CODE card fig.14 is provided together with the keys. On the card
you will find a mechanical code A and an electronic code B. Keep
the codes in a safe place, not in the car.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
The Electronic components inside the key may be
damaged if the key is subjected to shocks.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
B
A
fig. 14
CONTENTS
A0K0008m
41
MECHANICAL KEY
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The metal insert A-fig.15 operates:
❍ the ignition switch;
❍ the door lock.
The metal insert A-fig.16 operates:
❍ the ignition switch;
❍ the door lock.
Press B button to open/close the metal insert.
SAFETY
Press B button fig.16 only with the key away from
your body, especially your eyes and from objects
which could get damaged (e.g. your clothes). Do
not leave the key unattended to avoid the button being
accidentally pressed while it is being handled, e.g. by a
child.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
42
fig. 15
A0K0047m
fig. 16
A0K0048m
Unlocking the doors and the boot
Locking the doors and the boot
Briefly press Ë button: unlock of doors and boot, timed operation
of ceiling lights, double flash of the direction indicators (for versions/markets, where provided).
Door lock is automatically released if the fuel cut-off system trips.
Once the doors are locked, if one or more doors or the boot are
not closed correctly, the LED and direction indicators start flashing
quickly.
Briefly press Á button: lock of doors and boot with ceiling lights off
and single flash of direction indicators (for versions/markets, where
provided).
If one or more door are open, the doors will not be locked. This is
indicated by a rapid flashing of the direction indicators (for versions/markets, where provided). The doors will be locked even
if the boot is open.
When a speed of over 20 km/h is reached, the doors are automatically locked if this specific function has been set (only on versions with multi-function reconfigurable display).
When the doors are locked from outside the car (using the remote
control), A LED fig.17 will light up for a few seconds and then start
flashing (deterrent function).
When the doors are locked from inside the car (by pressing ≈)
the LED will remain on constantly.
Opening the boot
Press R button to open the boot using the remote control. The
direction indicators will flash twice to indicate that the boot has
been opened.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 17
A0K0122m
43
REQUESTING ADDITIONAL REMOTE CONTROLS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The system can acknowledge up to 8 remote controls. If you need
to request a new remote control, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services, taking the CODE card (for versions/markets, where provided), an identity document and documents proving your ownership of the car with you.
REPLACING THE BATTERY KEY WITH REMOTE
CONTROL
Proceed as follows:
❍ press A button fig.18 and open out the B metal insert; turn C
screw to : using a small point screwdriver;
❍ remove the D battery holder case and replace E battery respecting the polarity; reinsert D case into the key and secure
it by turning C screw to Á.
Used batteries are harmful to the environment.
They should be disposed of as specified by law in
special containers or taken to an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider, which will take care of their disposal.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
44
fig. 18
A0K0051m
SAFE LOCK DEVICE
(for versions/markets where provided)
Switching the device off
This safety device prevents operation of the inside door handles
and of the door locking/unlocking button. We recommend that
you activate this device whenever you park your car.
The device disengages automatically by:
❍ opening the driver’s door using the metal insert;
❍ pressing the Ë button on the remote control;
❍ turning the ignition key to the MAR position
Switching the device on
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
The device is enabled on all the doors by quickly double-pressing
the Á button on the key.
The engagement of the device is indicated by three flashes of the
direction indicators and the flashing of A LED fig. 19. The device
will not switch on if one or more doors are not closed correctly.
Once the safe lock device is engaged it is impossible to open the doors from inside the car. Before
engaging the device, check that there is no one left
on board. If the remote control battery is flat, the device
can only be disengaged by using the metal insert in either of the door locks.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 19
A0K0122m
45
The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
46
Type of key
Mechanical key
Key with remote control
Doors
unlocking
Locking the doors
from the outside
Safe Lock engagement (for versions/
markets, where
provided)
Unlocking the
tailgate boot
Windows down
(for versions/
markets, where
provided)
Windows up
(for versions/
markets, where
provided)
Turn key
anticlockwise
(driver’s side)
Turn key
clockwise
(driver’s side)
–
–
–
–
Turn key
anticlockwise
(driver’s side)
Turn key
clockwise
(driver’s side)
–
–
–
–
Briefly press Ë
button
Briefly press Á
button
Double pressing Á
button
Briefly press R
button
(for longer than
2 seconds)
Hold pressed
Á button
(for longer than 2
seconds)
Hold pressed
Ë button
Direction indicators flashing
(only for key with
remote control)
double flashing
flashes once
flashes three times
flashes twice
flashes twice
flashes once
Deterrence LED
Switching off
Switching on constantly for about 3
seconds, followed
by deterrence LED
flashing
Double flash,
followed by
deterrence flashing
Deterrence LED
Switching off
Deterrence LED
IMPORTANT Windows will lower down when the doors are unlocked; they will be wound up when the doors are locked.
ALARM
(for versions/markets, where provided)
OPERATION OF THE ALARM
The alarm intervenes in the following instances:
❍ unauthorised opening of doors/bonnet/boot (perimeter protection);
❍ unauthorised operation of ignition system (ignition key rotated to MAR);
❍ the battery cables cutting;
❍ when someone is moving inside the passenger compartment
(volumetric protection);
❍ anomalous lifting/tilting of the vehicle (for versions/markets,
where provided).
Operation of the alarm is indicated by an acoustic and visual signal (flashing of the direction indicators for several seconds). The
alarm triggering modes may vary according to the markets. There
is a maximum number of acoustic/visual cycles. When this is
reached the system returns to normal operation.
IMPORTANT The engine locking function is guaranteed by the Alfa
Romeo CODE, which is automatically activated when the ignition
key is extracted from the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT The alarm is configured to comply with the regulations
existing in different countries.
SWITCHING ON THE ALARM
With the doors and bonnet closed and the ignition key either turned
to STOP or removed, direct the key with the remote control towards the car, then press and release Á button. Except specific
markets, the system produces a visual and acoustic signal and
enables door locking.
A self-diagnostic stage precedes the turning on of the alarm: In case
of faults the system will generate a further acoustic and/or visual signal using the LED on the dashboard.
If after the alarm is switched on, a second acoustic signal is emitted and/or the LED on the dashboard flashes, wait about 4 seconds and switch off the alarm by pressing Ë button, check that the
doors, bonnet and boot are closed correctly and then reactivate the
system by pressing Á button.
If the alarm produces an acoustic signal even when the doors, bonnet and boot are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in system
operation: in this case, go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
ALARM SELF-ACTIVATION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
If the alarm has not been activated using the remote control, once
about 30 seconds have elapsed from when the ignition key was
turned to STOP and a door or the tailgate was last opened and
then closed, the alarm activates automatically. This is indicated
by the LED on the button A-fig. 20 lighting up intermittently and
the indications of activation described previously.
To deactivate the alarm, press the Ë button on the remote control.
The alarm also activates when the doors are closed by turning
the metal insert of the key in the driver side door latch. If the system self-activates, the doors are not locked.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
47
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM
VOLUMETRIC/ANTI-LIFT PROTECTION
Press Ë button. The following operations are performed (excluding specific markets):
❍ the direction indicators flash twice;
❍ two brief acoustic signals are emitted;
❍ the doors are unlocked.
To guarantee the correct operation of the protection, completely
close the side windows and sunroof (for versions/markets, where
provided).
To disable the function, press A button fig. 20 before switching
on the alarm. The deactivation of the function is indicated by the
LED on A button flashing for several seconds.
The volume sensing/anti-tilt protection disabling procedure must
be repeated each time the key is turned off.
IMPORTANT Activating the central opening using the key metal
insert the alarm does not turn off.
EXCLUDING THE ALARM
STARTING
AND DRIVING
To permanently disable the alarm (e.g. for long storage of the car),
lock the car by turning the metal insert of the key with remote control in the lock.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT If the battery of the key with the remote control run
out or the system fails, the alarm can be switched off by placing
the key in the ignition switch and turning it to MAR.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
48
fig. 20
A0K0130m
IGNITION SWITCH
The key can be turned to three different positions fig. 21:
❍ STOP: engine off, key can be extracted, steering locked. Some
electric devices (e.g. car radio, central door locking system,
alarm, etc.) can work;
❍ MAR: driving position. All electric devices can work;
❍ ON: starting the engine.
The ignition switch is fitted with an electronic safety system that
requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the engine
will not start, before the starting operation can be repeated.
sible.
If the ignition switch is tampered with (e.g.: attempted theft), have it checked over by an Alfa
Romeo Authorised Service Provider as soon as pos-
Always remove the key when you leave your car
to prevent someone from accidentally operating
the controls. Remember to engage the handbrake.
Engage 1st gear if the car is parked uphill or reverse if the
car is parked downhill. Never leave children unattended
in the car.
SAFETY
STEERING LOCK
Engagement
When the key is at STOP, remove the key and turn the steering
wheel until it locks.
Disengagement
Move the steering wheel slightly and turn the ignition key to MAR.
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any aftermarket operation involving steering system or
steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of
anti-theft device). This could badly affect performance and
safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in the noncompliance of the car with approval requirements.
towed.
fig. 21
A0K0063m
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Never remove the key while the car is moving. The
steering wheel should lock automatically as soon
as it is turned. This also applies to when the car is
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
49
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
SEATS
Lengthwise adjustment
FRONT SEATS fig. 22
Lift A stalk and push the seat forwards or backwards: in the driving
position your arms should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.
All adjustments must be made with the car stationary.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
After releasing the adjustment lever, always check
that the seat is locked on the guides by trying to
move it back and forth. If it is not locked, the seat
may move unexpectedly and make you lose control of
the car.
Height adjustment
(for versions/markets, where provided)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Move lever B up or down until the required height is achieved.
IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment whilst seated in the driver’s
seat.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Backrest angle adjustment
Turn C knob until the required position is reached.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
For maximum protection, keep the back of your
seat upright, lean back into it and make sure the
seat belt fits closely across your chest and hips.
CONTENTS
50
fig. 22
A0K0076m
Heated seats
(for versions/markets, where provided)
ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS
fig. 24 (for versions/markets, where provided)
With the key turned to MAR, press A button fig. 23 to switch the
function on/off. When the function is enabled, the LED on the button turns on.
Electric lumbar adjustment
(for versions/markets where provided)
With the key turned to MAR, press B button fig. 23 to switch the
function on/off. When the function is enabled, the LED on the button turns on.
The following controls are provided for adjusting the seats:
Multifunction A control:
❍ front seat height adjustment (seat vertical movement);
❍ seat lengthwise movement
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
B: Backrest angle and lumbar adjustment;
C: Driver’s seat position storing buttons.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 23
A0K0213m
fig. 24
A0K0214m
51
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Memorising driver’s seat positions
Heated seats (for versions/markets, where provided)
The buttons C allow three different driver’s seat positions to be
memorised and recalled.
With the key at MAR, turn the A ring fig.25 to turn the function
on/off. Heating can be set to 3 different levels (0 = seat heating off).
To memorise a seat position, adjust it with the various controls,
then press the button where you want to memorise the position
for several seconds. The performed memorisation is confirmed by
a beep.
When a new seat position is memorised, the previously memorised
position on the same button is automatically overwritten.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
To recall a memorised position, press the relevant button briefly.
IMPORTANT Electric adjustment is only possible with the ignition
key turned to MAR-ON and for approximately 1 minute after turning it to STOP. The seat (driver's side or passenger's side) can be
moved after opening the relevant door for about 3 minutes, or as
long as the door is re-closed.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
52
fig. 25
A0K0215m
HEAD RESTRAINTS
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are adjustable in height and they lock automatically in the required position:
❍ upward adjustment: lift the head restraint until it locks
❍ downward adjustment, press the A button fig. 26 and lower
the head restraint.
Head restraints must be adjusted so that the head,
rather than the neck, rests on them. Only in this
case they can protect your head correctly.
To remove the head restraints:
❍ raise the head restraint to its maximum height;
❍ press A and B buttons fig. 26 and then remove the head restraints by sliding them upwards.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
“Anti-Whiplash” device
The head restraints are equipped with an “Anti-Whiplash” device,
which reduces the distance between head and head restraint in the
event of a rear impact, thus mitigating the “whiplash” effect.
The head restraint may move when the backrest is pressed by
the occupant’s torso or hand: this is an effect of the system and
not a fault.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 26
A0K0064m
53
STEERING WHEEL
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Two height-adjustable head restraints are provided for the back
seats (to adjust the height see the previous paragraph). On some
versions a head restraint is also provided for the central seat.
SAFETY
To remove the head restraints:
❍ raise the head restraints to their maximum height;
❍ press A and B buttons fig. 27 and then remove the head restraint by sliding it upwards.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
It can be adjusted axially and vertically.
To adjust, release A lever fig. 28 by pushing it forwards (position
1) and adjust the steering wheel. Then lock lever A by pulling it
towards the steering wheel (position 2).
Any adjustment of the steering wheel position must
be carried out only with the car stationary and the
engine turned off.
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any aftermarket operation involving steering system or
steering column modifications (e.g. installing an
anti-theft device) that could badly affect performance and
safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in the car
failing to comply with regulations.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
54
fig. 27
A0K0065m
fig. 28
A0K0077m
REARVIEW MIRRORS
Electrochromic internal mirror
(for versions/markets, where provided)
INTERNAL REARVIEW MIRROR
Some versions are equipped with an electrochromic mirror fig. 30.
The mirror will always be set to day use when reverse gear is engaged.
Operate A lever fig. 29 to adjust the mirror into two different positions: normal or anti-glare.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 29
A0K0079m
fig. 30
A0K0119m
55
EXTERNAL REARVIEW MIRRORS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Rearview mirror electric folding
(for versions/markets where provided)
As the driver’s external rearview mirror is curved,
it may slightly alter the perception of distance.
To fold back the mirrors press C button fig. 31. Press the button
once again to turn the mirrors back to the driving position.
Manual rearview mirror folding fig. 32
SAFETY
Adjusting the mirror
The mirrors can be adjusted/folded only if the ignition key is in
MAR position.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Select the mirror you wish to adjust using A device fig. 31:
❍ device in position 1: left mirror selected;
❍ device in position 2: right mirror selected.
To adjust the selected mirror, press B button in the four directions
shown by the arrows.
If required, the mirrors can be folded back manually from position 1 to position 2.
IMPORTANT When driving, the mirrors should always be in position 1.
IMPORTANT Once adjustment is complete, turn A device to position
0 to prevent accidental movements.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
56
fig. 31
A0K0066m
fig. 32
A0K0052m
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
CENTRAL AIR VENTS
SIDE AIR VENTS fig. 33
Use A device fig. 34 to direct the vents to the required position.
Turn B rings downwards to adjust the air flow.
A - Adjustable side air vents:
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
❍ use B device to adjust the vent to the required position;
❍ turn C ring leftwards to adjust the air flow.
SAFETY
D - Fixed side air vent.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 33
A0K0103m
fig. 34
A0K0104m
57
UPPER AIR VENTS fig. 35
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
A - Adjustable upper air vents. Turn B rings rightwards to adjust
the air flow.
C - Fixed upper air vent.
REAR AIR VENT fig. 36
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Use A device to adjust the vent to the required position.
Turn B ring rightwards to adjust the air flow:
● = All closed
= All open
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
58
fig. 35
A0K0105m
fig. 36
A0K0106m
TEMPERATURE COMFORT
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 37
A0K0107m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
VENTS fig. 37
1. Upper fixed vent - 2. Upper fixed vents - 3. Side fixed vent - 4. Side adjustable vents - 5. Central adjustable vents - 6. Lower rear seat
vents - 7. Adjustable rear seat vent (for versions/markets, where provided)
CONTENTS
59
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
60
fig. 38
A0K0055m
CONTROLS fig. 38
D heated rear windscreen on/off button;
A air temperature adjustment knob:
❍ blue zone = cold air
❍ red zone = hot air
B climate control compressor on/off button;
C fan activation/adjustment knob:
❍ 0 = fan off
❍ 1-2-3-4-5-6 = fan speed
E air distribution knob:
❍ various selections are possible
❍ quick demisting (windscreen and side windows)
F air recirculation on/off button
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (cooling)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING
Proceed as follows to cool the passenger compartment:
❍ turn A knob to the blue section;
❍ press F button to turn air recirculation on (the circular LED
around the button should be on);
❍ turn E knob to r;
❍ press B button to turn the climate control system on and turn C
knob to at least 1 (1st speed); for faster action, turn C knob to 6
(maximum fan speed).
Proceed as follows to rapidly heat the passenger compartment:
❍ turn A knob to the red section;
❍ press F button to turn on the air recirculation system;
❍ turn E knob to s;
❍ turn C knob to 6 (maximum fan speed).
Then use the controls to maintain the required comfort conditions
and press button F to turn air recirculation off (the circular LED
around the button will be off) and prevent misting up.
Adjusting cooling
❍ turn A knob to right to increase the temperature;
❍ press F button to turn air recirculation system off (the circular
LED around the button should be off);
❍ turn C knob to reduce fan speed.
IMPORTANT: When the engine is cold, it takes a few minutes to
obtain fast heating.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
61
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
62
AUTOMATIC DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
(MAX-DEF function)
This function automatically demists/defrosts the following: windscreen and front side windows, heated spray nozzles, heater external rearview mirrors.
To activate the function on, turn the E knob to the “Defrosting”
symbol identified by the - symbol. The manual climate control
system will automatically set itself to the following configuration:
❍ demisting symbol - from red to orange (to indicate that the
function is on);
❍ the heated rear windscreen (and all the installed defrosting
devices) will be turned on. The circular LED around the button
( will light up to indicate that the function is on;
❍ the air flow will go to maximum speed (6);
❍ air circulation will be opened, if it was closed (the circular LED
about the corresponding button will be off);
❍ air mixing to maximum heating;
❍ additional electric heater (for versions/markets, where provided) will be turned on;
❍ the compressor will be activated (the circular LED will stay on
to indicate that the AC function is on).
Window demisting
The climate control system is very useful in preventing the windows
from misting up in the event of high levels of humidity.
In the event of considerable outside moisture and/or rain and/or
considerable differences in temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, proceed as follows to demist the windows:
❍ turn A knob to the red section;
❍ press F button to disable the air recirculation system (the LED
on the button should be off);
❍ turn E knob to - and move it to position u (B-fig. 38a) if
demisting does not take place;
❍ turn C knob to the 2nd speed.
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
HEATED REAR WINDSCREEN
Press D button (() to turn the function on/off. The function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
For versions/markets, where provided, pressing the ( button
also defrost/demist the external rearview mirrors and the heated
spray nozzles (for versions/markets, where provided).
IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rear
windscreen over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might
cause them to stop working properly.
AIR RECIRCULATION
Press F (v) button so that the LED on the button lights up. It
is advisable to switch air recirculation on while standing in traffic
or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air.
Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if there are many
passengers on board, to prevent the windows from misting up.
IMPORTANT The air recirculation system makes it possible to reach
the required heating or cooling conditions faster. Do not use the air
recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably
increase the possibility of the windows misting.
AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION
Turn E knob fig. 38 to manually select one of the four possible
air distribution settings in the passenger compartment:
x Air flow to the windscreen and front side window vents to
demist/defrost them.
s Air flow to the front and rear footwell vents. This air distribution allows the passenger compartment to be warmed up
quickly.
y Air flow distribution between front and rear vents, centre/side
dashboard vents, rear vent and windscreen and front side window demisting/defrosting vents.
r Air flow distribution to centre/side dashboard vents (passenger’s body).
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
63
Four other positions are provided (see diagram below):
START&STOP
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Manual climate control system
The system will remain set to the air flow setting made by the user
when the Start&Stop function is operated (engine off when speed
is zero). Cooling and heating in the passenger compartment is not
guaranteed in these conditions because the compressor and the
engine coolant pump are both stopped. To privilege climate control system operation, press the button on the dashboard to turn
the Start&Stop function off.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
fig. 38a
A0K0083m
v (A Position) Air flow distribution between centre/side dash-
board vents, rear vent and windscreen and front side window
demisting/defrosting vents. This distribution setting ventilates
the passenger compartment and prevents the windows from
misting up.
u (B Position) Air flow distributed between foot well vents and
windscreen and front side window defrosting/demisting vents.
This distribution setting allows warms up the passenger compartment and prevents the windows from misting up.
w (C Position) Air flow distribution between footwell vents
(warmer air) and centre/side dashboard vents and rear vent
(cooler air).
CONTENTS
64
- (D Position) Automatic demisting/defrosting activation (see
description of the previous pages).
NOTA In particularly severe climate conditions it is recommended
to limit the use of the Start&Stop function to prevent the compressor from continuously switching on and off, with following fast window misting and accumulation of humidity with unpleasant
smells in the passenger compartment.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Operate the climate control system for at least 10 minutes every
month during the winter. Have the system checked by Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services before the summer.
AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
(for versions/markets, where provided)
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
fig. 39
CONTROLS fig. 39
A driver’s side temperature adjustment knob
B internal air recirculation on/off button
C climate control compressor on/off button
D heated rear windscreen on/off button
E climate control system on/off button
F fan speed knob
G fan speed indicator LED;
A0K0056m
H air distribution selection buttons
I MAX-DEF function button (fast front window defrosting/ demisting), heated rear windscreen and heated exterior mirrors (for
versions/markets where provided);
L Passenger’s side temperature adjustment knob
M MONO function button (set temperature alignment) driver/
passenger side
N AUTO function activation button (automatic operation)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
65
DESCRIPTION
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
66
The automatic dual zone climate control system regulates the temperature in the passenger compartment in two areas. The system
keeps the comfort in the passenger compartment constant and
compensates for variable external conditions.
NOTE The reference temperature is 22°C for optimal comfort management.
The automatically controlled parameters and functions are:
❍ air temperature delivered to driver/front passenger vents;
❍ air distribution to driver/front passenger vents;
❍ fan speed (continuous air flow variation);
❍ switching the compressor fan on (for cooling/dehumidifying
the air);
❍ air recirculation.
All these functions can be manually adjusted by operating the system and selecting one or more functions and modifying their parameters. Automatic control of the manually changed functions will
be suspended: the system will only override your settings for safety reasons.
Manual selections will always have higher priority over automatic
settings and will be stored until the AUTO button is pressed, except
for the cases in which the system will intervene for particular, safety-related reasons.
You can adjust one function automatically and have the automatic system control all the others. The amount of air introduced into
the passenger compartment is not affected by vehicle speed; it is
electronically controlled by a fan. The air temperature is always automatically controlled according to the temperature shown on the
display (except for when the system is off or in certain conditions
when the compressor is not running).
The system can manually programme and adjuste:
❍ air temperature on driver’s/passenger’s side;
❍ fan speed (continuous variation);
❍ air distribution to 7 positions;
❍ climate control compressor enabled;
❍ fast demisting/defrosting function;
❍ air recirculation;
❍ heated rear windscreen;
❍ turning the system off.
The climate control system uses an average radiating temperature sensor installed under a cover
below the inner rearview mirror. To ensure optimal operation of the climate control system, do not obstruct the detection cone of this sensor with any object.
SWITCHING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ON
ADJUSTING THE AIR TEMPERATURE
The system can be turned on in different ways: you are recommended to press the AUTO button and turn the knobs to set the required temperatures.
In this way the system operates completely automatically to adjust the temperature, quantity and distribution of the air introduced
into the passenger compartment. It also manages the air recirculation system and the enablement of the air conditioning compressor.
During fully automatic system operation, you can change at any
time the set temperatures, air distribution and fan speed by using
the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will automatically change
its settings to adjust to the new requirements.
During fully automatic operation (AUTO), the word AUTO will disappear if the air distribution and/or flow rate and/or engagement
of the compressor and/or recirculation settings are changed.
In this way the climate control system will continue to automatically manage all functions except for those that have been manually adjusted. There is only one fan speed in all the areas of the
passenger compartment.
Turn A or L knob to right or left to adjust the air temperature: A
knob for the front left-hand area, L knob for the front right-hand
area of the passenger compartment. The set temperatures are
shown on the display.
Press the MONO button to align the air temperature between the
two zones.
Turn L knob to go back to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones.
Turn the knobs fully clockwise or anti-clockwise to engage respectively HI (maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling). To deactivate these functions, rotate the temperature knob to the desired temperature.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
67
SETTING THE AIR DISTRIBUTION
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Press H ( / / ) buttons to manually select one of the seven possible air distribution settings:
Air flow to the windscreen and front side window vents to
demist/defrost them.
SAFETY
Air flow from central and side dashboard vents to ventilate
the chest and the face during the hot season.
Air flow to the front and rear footwell vents. This air distribuSTARTING
AND DRIVING
tion setting heats the passenger compartment most quickly,
giving a prompt sensation of warmth.
Air flow distribution between footwell vents (hotter air) and
centre and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution
setting is useful in spring and autumn on a sunny day.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
68
Air flow distributed between foot well vents and windscreen
and front side window defrosting/demisting vents. This distribution setting allows to warm up the passenger compartment
and prevents the windows from misting up.
Air flow distribution between windscreen demisting/defrosting
vents and side and central dashboard vents. This setting allows
air to be sent to the windscreen in conditions of strong sunlight.
Air flow distribution to all vents in the car.
In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically manage
air distribution settings; the LED on H buttons are off.
When set manually, the set distribution is shown by the LEDs on
the selected buttons.
In combined function mode the relevant function is enabled simultaneously with those already set by pressing the corresponding button. If a button whose function is active yet is pressed, the
operation is cancelled and the corresponding LED goes off. To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a manual selection, press the AUTO button.
REGULATING THE FAN SPEED
Turn F knob to increase/decrease the fan speed. The speed is displayed by the G LEDs on the F knob.
❍ maximum fan speed = all LED lit up;
❍ minimum fan speed = one LED lit.
The fan can only be excluded if the climate control compressor
has been switched off by pressing B button.
IMPORTANT To restore automatic fan speed control after a manual adjustment, press the AUTO button.
AUTO BUTTON
By pressing the AUTO button (LED on button lit) the climate control system automatically adjust the following settings in the corresponding zones:
❍ air quantity and distribution in the passenger compartment;
❍ climate control compressor;
❍ air recirculation
❍ cancelling any previous manual settings.
The LED on the AUTO button will light up to indicate that the function is on. By manually adjusting at least one of the functions automatically managed by the system (air recirculation, air distribution, fan speed or compressor on/off), the LED will go off, indicating that the system is no longer automatically controlling all the
functions.
IMPORTANT If the system is unable to reach/maintain the required
temperature in the various areas of the passenger compartment,
the set temperature will flash for a few seconds.
To restore automatic system control after one or more manual
adjustments, press the AUTO button.
MONO BUTTON
Press the MONO button (LED on button lit) to align the air temperature on passenger’s side with that on driver’s side.
This function makes temperature regulation easier when the driver
is travelling alone.
Turn L knob to set the temperature on passenger’s side and go back
to separate air temperature management.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
69
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
70
AIR RECIRCULATION AND AQS
(Air Quality System) FUNCTION
Turning the AQS (Air Quality System)
function on
The air recirculation is managed according to the following operating logics:
❍ automatic engagement: A word on B button on;
❍ forced engagement (air recirculation always on): LED on v
A button on and A word off;
❍ forced disengagement (air recirculation always off, air taken
from the outside): the LED on v A buttons will switch off
and the A word on B button will switch off.
Forced on/off mode can be selected by pressing button v A..
When g (E button off ) is pressed, the climate control system
automatically activates air recirculation (the LED on v A button should be on). Press v A button to turn external air recirculation on (LED on button lit) and vice versa.
AQS (Air Quality System) function cannot be operated when g
button is pressed (LED on button off).
The AQS function automatically activates internal air recirculation
when the outside air is polluted (e.g. in traffic queues and tunnels).
IMPORTANT With the AQS function active, after the internal air
recirculation system has been running for a certain time, the climate control system enables the intake of outside air for approximately 1 minute. This takes place regardless of the pollution level of the outside air.
IMPORTANT The air recirculation system makes it possible to reach
the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting up inside (especially
if the climate control system is off). When the outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off (air drawn from the outside)
to prevent the windows misting up.
In automatic operation inside air recirculation will be controlled automatically by the system according to outside environmental conditions.
It is advisable not to use the air recirculation function when the outside temperature is low to prevent the windows from rapidly misting up.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPRESSOR
Press C to turn the compressor on/off (the LED on the button will
light up when the compressor is on). The system remembers that
the compressor has been switched off, even after the engine has
stopped.
When the compressor is switched off the system deactivates air recirculation to prevent the windows from misting up and deactivates
the AQS function. In this case, although the system is capable of
maintaining the required temperature, the AUTO LED will go out.
The temperatures will flash for a few seconds if the required temperature cannot be maintained.
To restore automatic control for switching on the climate control
compressor, press C button again or press the AUTO button.
With compressor off:
❍ if the outside temperature is higher than the set one, the system will not be able to satisfy the request. The temperature
value will then flash on the display for a few seconds;
❍ the fan speed can be manually reset.
When the compressor is on and the engine is running, manual ventilation cannot drop under the maximum speed (only one LED on).
IMPORTANT With the climate control compressor off, it is not possible to admit air into the passenger compartment with a temperature below the outside temperature; moreover, under certain environmental conditions the windows could mist up very quickly since
the air cannot be dehumidified.
RAPID WINDOW DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
(MAX-DEF function)
Press -to turn windscreen and side window demisting/defrosting
function on (LED on button lit). The climate control system carries
out the following operations:
❍ switches on the climate control compressor when climatic conditions allow;
❍ turns air recirculation off;
❍ sets maximum air temperature (HI) in both zones;
❍ sets proper fan speed according to the engine coolant temperature;
❍ directs air flow to the windscreen and front side windows vents;
❍ the heated rear windscreen is turned on
❍ shows fan speed (LED G lit).
IMPORTANT The MAX-DEF function will remain on for approximately
3 minutes from when the engine coolant reaches adequate temperature.
The LED on the AUTO button will go out when the function is on.
With the function activated the only possible manual adjustments
are adjusting the fan speed and the turning the heated rear windscreen off. By pressing B, C, - or AUTO buttons, the climate
control system will turn the MAX-DEF off.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
71
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
72
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
HEATED REAR WINDSCREEN
Press ( to turn heated rear windscreen demisting/defrosting function on (LED on button lit). This function switches off automatically
after about 20 minutes or when the engine is turned off. It is not
switched on automatically the next time the engine is started. For
versions/markets, where provided, pressing the ( button it is also possible to defrost/demist the external rearview mirrors (for
versions/markets, where provided) and the heated spray nozzles
(for versions/markets, where provided).
TURNING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM OFF
Press g button (LED on button off):
❍ air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger compartment
from the outside;
❍ the compressor is off;
❍ the fan is off.
❍ the heated rear windscreen can be switched on or off.
❍ the AQS (Air Quality System) function cannot be turned on.
IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rear
windscreen on the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might
cause them to stop working properly.
IMPORTANT The climate control system control unit stores the temperatures set before the system was switched off and restores
the same conditions when any button of the system is pressed (except for D button).
Thermal comfort windscreen
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Press AUTO button to restart the climate control system in fully
automatic mode.
Some versions feature a thermal comfort windscreen which, with
the car exposed to the sun, limits the extent of temperature increase inside the passenger compartment, thus ensuring greater
comfort.
Humidity sensor (for versions/markets, where provided)
The humidity sensor prevents the windows from misting up. For
full operation, it is advisable to turn the AUTO on (LED N on). When
the outside temperature is low, the system could automatically turn
the compressor on and turn air recirculation off for safer driving.
START&STOP
Automatic climate control system
The automatic climate control system manages the Start&Stop
function (engine off when speed is zero) to ensure adequate comfort inside the passenger compartment.
Specifically, the Start&Stop function is turned off when the weather is particularly hot or cold to guarantee an adequate level of comfort inside the passenger compartment; therefore, the engine will
not be stopped during these transient conditions, even if the speed
is zero.
When the Start&Stop is on and the engine is off at zero speed,
the climate control system will turn the engine back on if the inside temperature conditions should rapidly deteriorate (or if the
user asks for maximum cooling – LO – or quick demisting –
MAX-DEF).
With the Start&Stop function on and engine off at zero speed,
air flow is reduced to the minimum to main comfort conditions inside the passenger compartment as long as possible when the system is in AUTO mod (LED N on).
The climate control system attempts to manage the discomfort
caused by the engine stopping (compressor and engine coolant
pump off) but operation of the climate control system can be privileged by turning the Start&Stop off by pressing the button on
the dashboard.
NOTE In particularly severe climate conditions it is recommended to limit the use of the Start&Stop function to prevent the compressor from continuously switching on and off, with following fast window misting and accumulation of humidity with unpleasant
smells in the passenger compartment.
NOTE When the Start&Stop function is active (engine off and
vehicle speed zero), the automatic recirculation management is
turned off always taking air in from outside, to reduce the probability of window misting up (as the compressor is off).
SUPPLEMENTARY ELECTRIC HEATER
(for versions/markets where provided)
This device speeds up passenger compartment warming when it is
very cold. The additional heater turns off automatically after reaching the required comfort conditions.
Automatic dual zone climate control system
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The supplementary electric heater is operated automatically according to environmental conditions and when the engine is running.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Manual climate control system
The supplementary heater is activated automatically by turning A
knob to the end of the red section and setting the fan (knob B)
to at least the 1st speed.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT NOTES
The heater only works if the outside temperature and engine coolant
temperature are low.
The heater will not activate if the battery voltage is too low.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
73
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
LEFT STALK fig. 40
The left stalk operates most of the external lights. The external
lights can only be switched on when the ignition key is at MAR.
The instrument panel and the various controls on the dashboard
will come on when the external lights are switched on.
DAY LIGHTS (DRL) “Daytime Running Lights”
STARTING
AND DRIVING
With the ignition key turned to MAR and A ring fig.40 turned to
position O the day lights are turned on; the other lights remain off.
For day light functions, see the “Menu Items” paragraph in this
chapter. If the function is deactivated, no lights are switched on
when the A ring is turned to position O.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
With the ignition key turned to MAR, turn A ring fig. 40 to 2. The
day lights are switched off and the side lights and dipped beam headlights are switched on. The warning light 3 in the instrument panel comes on.
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can be turned on only with the ignition key at STOP
or removed, by turning the ring A-fig. 40 first to O and then to
2.
The warning light 3 on the instrument panel will come on. Operate the direction indicator stalk to select the side (right or left).
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL (AUTOLIGHT)
(Dusk sensor) (for versions/markets, where provided)
This system consists of an infrared LED sensor combined with a rain
sensor installed on the windscreen. It can detect changes of light
intensity outside the car according to the light sensitivity setting
programmed in the set-up menu: the higher the sensitivity, the lower the amount of external light needed to switch the lights on.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Activation
A.
The dusk sensor is activated by turning the A ring fig. 40 to 2
In this way the side lights and dipped beam headlights are both
switched on automatically according to the outside light level.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
74
fig. 40
A0K0099m
IMPORTANT The sensor is unable to detect the presence of fog. Under these circumstances, these lights are therefore turned on manually.
When the lights are turned on by the sensor, the fog lights (for versions/markets, where provided) and the rear fog lights may be
turned on. When the lights are automatically switched off, the front
and rear fog lights (if activated) are also switched off. The next
time the lights are switched on automatically, the fog lights must
be reactivated manually (if required).
With the sensor active, it is possible to flash the headlights but
the main beam headlights cannot be switched on. If you need to
turn these lights on, turn A ring fig. 40 to position 2 and turn
the dipped beam headlights on.
When the lights have been activated automatically and are then
switched off by the sensor, the dipped beam headlights are switched
off first, followed by the side lights a few seconds later.
If the sensor is activated but is malfunctioning, the side lights and
dipped beam headlights are switched on independently of the outside light level and the sensor fault is indicated on the instrument
panel display. It is also possible to deactivate the sensor and switch
on these light.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
With A ring in position 2 pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
(stable position). The warning light 1 on the instrument panel
will come on. To turn the lights off, pull the stalk again towards
the steering wheel (dipped beam headlights will stay on). It is
not possible to switch on the main beam headlights in fixed mode
if the automatic lighting control system is active.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
FLASHINGS
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable position) regardless of the position of A ring. The 1 warning light will come
on in the instrument panel.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Put the stalk in the stable position:
❍ upward: activation of right direction indicator;
❍ downward: activation of left direction indicator.
Lights ¥ or Î will flash on the instrument panel. The direction indicators are switched off automatically when the steering wheel
is straightened.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
“Lane change” function
If you want to signal that you are changing lane, hold the left stalk
in the unstable position for less than half a second. The direction
indicator on the selected side flashes five times and then switches off automatically.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
75
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE
EXTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
This device allows you to illuminate the area in front of the car
for a certain amount of time.
This function lights up the vehicle and the space around it when
the doors are unlocked.
Activation
Activation
With the ignition key on STOP or removed, pull A stalk fig. 40 towards the steering wheel within 2 minutes of the engine switching off.
Each time the stalk is moved, the lights stay on for an extra 30
seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lights are
switched off automatically.
The 3 warning light on the instrument panel will light up (and
the corresponding message will appear on the display) as long as
the function is active.
The light comes on when the stalk is first moved and stays on until the function is automatically deactivated. Each movement of the
stalk increases only the amount of time the lights stay on.
When the car is parked and the doors are unlocked by pressing the
Ë button on the remote control (or the boot is unlocked by pressing R), the dipped beam headlights, side lights and number
plate lights are activated.
The lights remain lit for approximately 25 seconds unless the doors
and boot are locked once again, the doors or boot are opened
and closed or the instrument panel is activated. In these cases they
go out after 5 seconds.
The exterior courtesy lights can be enabled/disabled using the Setup Menu (see the paragraph “Menu Items” in this chapter).
Deactivation
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
76
Keep the A stalk fig. 40 pulled towards the steering wheel for more
than 2 seconds.
WINDOW CLEANING
The right stalk controls windscreen wiper/washer and heated rear
windscreen wiper/washer operation.
WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER fig. 41
This only operates with the ignition turned to MAR. The ring nut A
can have the following positions::
O
windscreen wiper off;
≤ intermittent operation (low speed);
AUTO rain sensor activation (for versions/markets, where provided) (the windscreen wiper speed is automatically adapted to the intensity of the rain)
intermittent operation;
≥ slow operation;
¥ fast operation.
n
Move the stalk up (unstable position) to limit operation to the time
for which the stalk is held in this position. When released, the stalk
will return to its default position and the wiper will be automatically stopped.
Do not use the windscreen wipers to remove layers of snow or ice from the windscreen. In such conditions, the windscreen wipers may be subjected to
excessive stress, prompting intervention from the motor
protection which prevents operation for a few seconds. If
operation is not restored, even after turning the key and
restarting the engine, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the
blades lifted from the windscreen.
“Smart washing” function
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable position) to operate the windscreen washer jet. Keep the stalk pulled for more
than half a second, with just one movement, to operate windscreen
washer/wiper jet at the same time.
The wiper stops working three strokes after the stalk is released.
A further stroke after approximately six seconds completes the wiping cycle.
fig. 41
A0K0097m
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
77
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
RAIN SENSOR fig. 42
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is an infrared LED sensor fitted on the windscreen. It can detect the presence of rain and consequently manage windscreen wiping in accordance with the amount of water on the windscreen.
Activation
The sensor is activated by turning the A ring fig. 41 to the
“automatic” position (“AUTO”): the frequency of the windscreen
wiper strokes is automatically adjusted depending on the amount
of water on the windscreen. This frequency can vary from no stroke
(no rain - windscreen dry) up to the 2nd constant speed operation
(heavy rain - windscreen wet).
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted through the Set
Up menu (see “Display” paragraph in this chapter).
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
78
fig. 42
A0K0111m
If the engine is switched off with the stalk in the automatic position, no wiping cycle will take place when the engine is started
again even if it is raining. This prevents accidental activation of the
rain sensor when the engine is started (i.e. when the windscreen
is being washed by hand or the wipers are stuck to the windscreen
by ice).
To restore automatic operation of the rain sensor, turn the ring on
the right A stalk fig. 41 from automatic position (AUTO) to O position and then turn A ring back to the AUTO position.
When the rain sensor is reactivated using any of the manoeuvres
described above, reactivation is indicated by a single stroke of
the windscreen wipers, regardless of the condition of the windscreen. If the sensitivity of the rain sensor is adjusted whilst it is
in operation, a single stroke of the windscreen wiper takes place
to confirm the changed setting.
In the event of the malfunction of the rain sensor whilst it is active, the windscreen wiper operates intermittently at a speed consistent with the sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, regardless of
whether it is raining or not (the sensor fault is indicated on the
instrument panel display). The sensor continues to operate and it
is possible to set the windscreen wiper to continuous mode (1st or
2nd speed). The fault indication remains for as long as the sensor
is active.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Activation
This only operates with the ignition turned to MAR.
Turn B ring fig. 41 from position O to position ' to turn on the
rear window wiper as follows:
❍ intermittent operation if the windscreen wiper is off;
❍ synchronised operation (but with half-stroke frequency) when
the windscreen wiper is on;
❍ continuous operation with reverse engaged and windscreen
wiper on.
With reverse gear engaged and windscreen wiper on, the rear window wiper is activated in continuous mode. Pushing the stalk towards the dashboard (temporary position) the rear window washer jet will activate.
Keeping the stalk pushed for more than half a second also the rear
window wiper will activate. Releasing the stalk will activate the
smart washing function, as described for the windscreen wiper.
CRUISE CONTROL
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
(for versions/markets, where provided)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This is an electronic driving aid that allows you to drive at a speed
of above 30 km/h on long and straight dry roads (e.g. motorways), at a preset speed without having to press the accelerator
pedal. It is therefore not recommended to use this device on country roads with traffic. Do not use it in town.
TURNING THE DEVICE ON
Turn ring A-fig. 43 to ON. The device cannot be turned on in 1st or
reverse gear. It is advisable to engage it in 5th gear or higher.
When travelling downhill with the device engaged, the car may
slightly exceed the preset speed. When the device is activated, Ü
light comes on together with the relevant message on the instrument panel (for versions/markets, where provided).
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 43
A0K0098m
79
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
80
STORING THE SPEED
INCREASING THE STORED SPEED
Proceed as follows:
❍ turn A ring fig. 43 to ON and press the accelerator until the
car reaches the desired speed;
❍ move the stalk upwards (+) for at least one second, then release it. The speed is now stored and you can therefore release
the accelerator pedal.
If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can accelerate simply by pressing the accelerator pedal; when you come off the pedal, the car will return to the speed memorised previously.
Press the accelerator and store the new speed or move the stalk
upwards (+). Each movement of the stalk will correspond to an
increase in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held
upwards the speed will continuously increase.
RESTORING STORED SPEED
If the device was disengaged - for example by pressing the brake
or clutch pedal - the stored speed can be reset as follows:
❍ accelerate gradually until reaching a speed approaching the one
stored;
❍ engage the gear selected at the time of speed storing;
❍ press RES button (B-fig. 43).
REDUCING THE STORED SPEED
Deactivate the device and store the new speed or move the stalk
downwards (–) until the new speed is reached. It will then automatically be stored. Each movement of the stalk will correspond
to a reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk
held downwards will continuously reduce the speed.
TURNING THE DEVICE OFF
To release:
❍ turn the A ring fig. 43 to OFF;
or
❍ stop the engine;
or
❍ press the brake pedal, the clutch or the accelerator; in this
last case the system is not actually turned off but the system
gives priority to the acceleration request. The device still remains active, without the need to press the RES button to return to the previous condition once acceleration is concluded.
Turning the device off automatically
The device is automatically turned off in the following cases:
❍ if the ABS or VDC systems intervene;
❍ with car speed below the preset limit;
❍ in the event of system fault.
Do not position the gear lever in neutral when driving with the device on.
CEILING LIGHTS
FRONT CEILING LIGHT fig. 44
A Switch is used to switch the ceiling lights on/off.
A Switch positions:
❍ central position (position 1): C and D lights come on/off when
the doors are opened/closed;
❍ pressed to the left (position 0): C and D lights are always off;
❍ pressed to the right (position 2): C and D lights are always on.
Lights are gradually switched on/off.
In the event of faulty operation or fault, turn the
ring A-fig. 43 to OFF and contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 44
A0K0061m
81
B switch operates the map reading light.
B switch positions:
❍ central position (position 1): C and D lights are always off;
❍ pressed to the left (position 0): C light on;
❍ pressed to the right (position 2): D light on.
CEILING LIGHT TIMING
SAFETY
IMPORTANT Before getting out of the car, make sure that both
switches are in the central position: closing the doors the lights will
go out avoiding to drain the battery.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
In any case, if the switch is left inadvertently in the On position,
the ceiling lights will turn off automatically 15 minutes after turning the engine off.
The ceiling lights switch on according to the following modes:
❍ for about 10 seconds when the front doors are unlocked;
❍ for about 3 minutes when one of the doors is opened;
❍ for about 10 seconds when the doors are closed.
The timing is interrupted when the ignition is turned to MAR.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
On certain versions, two different timed switching-on modes have
been provided to facilitate getting in/out of the car at night or with
poor lighting.
Timing while getting into the car
Timing while getting out of the car
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
82
After removing the key from the ignition switch, the courtesy lights
will turn on as follows:
❍ within 2 minutes from turning the engine off for about 10
seconds;
❍ for about 3 minutes when one of the doors is opened;
❍ when one of the doors is closed for about 10 seconds.
Timing will stop automatically when locking the doors.
REAR CEILING LIGHT
Press the A lens fig. 45 to turn the light on/off.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the doors are closed
and will then go off automatically. The light will go out when the
ignition is turned to MAR.
COURTESY LIGHTS fig. 46
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Two B courtesy lights are present behind the sun visors. Lift the A
cover to turn the lights on.
IMPORTANT The light will go out automatically after a few minutes
if a door is forgotten open. Open another door or close and reopen
the concerned door.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 45
A0K0092m
fig. 46
A0K0114m
83
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
PUDDLE LIGHTS fig. 47
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT fig. 49
These lights are located in the front and rear doors. They are turned
on/off when any door is opened regardless of the position of the
ignition switch.
This light comes on automatically when the glove compartment is
opened and switches off when it is closed.
The light will be turned on/off regardless of the position of the
ignition key.
BOOT LIGHT fig. 48
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
This is located on the left-hand side of the boot. This light comes
on automatically when the boot is opened and switches off when
it is closed.
The light will be turned on/off regardless of the position of the
ignition key.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 48
A0K0141m
fig. 49
A0K0171m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
84
fig. 47
A0K0221m
CONTROLS
FRONT FOG LIGHTS fig. 51
(for versions/markets, where provided)
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS fig. 50
Press 5 button to switch on/off the lights. Press the button again
to turn the lights off. The 5 warning light on the instrument panel and the LED on the button itself will light up when the lights
are on.
Press A switch to switch on/off the lights. Ÿ and Δ warning
lights come on and the A switch will flash when the lights are on.
The use of hazard lights is governed by the Highway Code of the country you are in. Keep to the
rules.
Emergency braking
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
REAR FOG LIGHTS fig. 51
Press 4 button to switch on/off the lights. The rear fog lights
are only enabled with the dipped beam headlights on. Press the
button again to turn the lights off or turn off the dipped beam headlights and/or the front fog lights (for versions/markets, where provided). 4 warning light on the instrument panel and the LED over
the button itself will light up when the lights are on.
In the event of emergency braking the hazard warning lights are
lit up automatically along with the Ÿ and Δ warning lights on
the instrument panel. The lights are switched off automatically
when the nature of braking changes.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 50
A0K0093m
fig. 51
A0K0120m
85
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
AFS ADAPTIVE LIGHTS
(Adaptive Frontlight System) fig. 52
(for versions/markets, where provided)
DOOR LOCK fig. 53
This is a system combined with xenon headlamps which directs the
main light beam and continuously and automatically adapts it to
the driving conditions round bends/when cornering. The system
directs the light beam to light up the road in the best way, taking
into account the speed of the vehicle, the bend/corner angle and
the speed of steering.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated when the engine
is started. In this condition, LED A-fig. 52 will stay off. When the
button is pressed the adaptive lights (if on) are deactivated and the
LED A-fig. 52 in the button comes on continuously.
Press button again to turn the adaptive lights on (LED off).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Press ≈ to lock all the doors at the same time (the LED on the
button will light up when the doors are locked. Locking takes place
regardless of the position of the ignition key.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
This system is tripped after a collision and activates the following
functions:
❍ cutting off fuel supply and consequently stopping the engine;
❍ automatically unlocking the doors;
❍ turning on the inside lights.
The intervention of the system is indicated by a message shown
on the display. Carefully check the car for fuel leaks, for instance
in the engine compartment, below the car or near the tank area.
After a crash, turn the ignition key to STOP to avoid draining the
battery.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
86
fig. 52
A0K0123m
fig. 53
A0K0145m
Follow the procedure below to restore correct operation of the
car:
❍ turn the ignition key to MAR;
❍ activate the right-hand direction indicator;
❍ deactivate the right-hand direction indicator;
❍ activate the left-hand direction indicator;
❍ deactivate the left-hand direction indicator;
❍ activate the right-hand direction indicator;
❍ deactivate the right-hand direction indicator;
❍ activate the left-hand direction indicator;
❍ deactivate the left-hand direction indicator;
❍ turn the ignition key to STOP.
INTERIOR FITTINGS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Upper compartment
Operate in the point shown by the arrow to open the compartment
A-fig. 54.
SAFETY
Passenger side glove compartment
Operate A handle fig. 55 to open the compartment. When the compartment is opened a courtesy light comes on.
There is a map pocket in the compartment and a sunglass holder
on the back of the hatch.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
If, after a collision, you smell fuel or notice leaks from
the fuel system, do not reset the system to avoid fire
risk.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 54
A0K0142m
fig. 55
A0K0100m
87
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
On some versions the compartments may be heated/cooled by an
air vent connected to the climate control system (operate wheel
A-fig. 55a to adjust the air flow rate to the lower compartment).
In versions with dual-zone automatic climate control system, the glove
compartment is set to the same temperature as the passenger's side.
In versions with dual zone automatic climate control system, a bottle/can holder is present inside the compartment on passenger
side.
FRONT ARM REST
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is located between the front seats. To bring this to the standard position of use, push it down as shown in the figure.
There is a compartment inside the arm rest: lift the A cover
fig. 56 to access the compartment.
One 50 cl bottle and two slim cans can be fitted inside at the same
time. The handbook may be inserted under the bottle holder with
the longer side facing towards the front of the car.
Do not travel with the compartments open: the
front seat occupants could be injured in case of
an accident.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
88
fig. 55a
A0K0185m
fig. 56
A0K0166m
REAR ARM REST fig. 57
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SKI COMPARTMENT fig. 57a
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To use A armrest fig. 57, lower it as shown in the figure. Two B
cup or can holders are obtained in the arm rest. To use these, pull
C tab in the direction shown by the arrow.
These is also an oddments compartment provided in the armrest;
this can be accessed by raising the flap.
The compartment may be used for carrying long loads. To access
the compartment, lower the rear arm rest and then press A device fig. 57a to lower the B hatch.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 57
A0K0211m
fig. 57a
A0K0217m
89
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
POWER SOCKET fig. 58
CIGAR LIGHTER fig. 59
This is located on the left-hand side of the boot. This operation is
possible only with the key turned to MAR.
This is located on the central tunnel. Press A button to activate
the cigar lighter. After a few seconds the button goes back to its
initial position and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
IMPORTANT Do not connect to the socket devices with power higher than 180 W. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors.
IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter has turned itself off.
IMPORTANT Do not connect to the socket devices with power higher than 180 W. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
The cigar lighter becomes very hot. Handle it carefully and make sure children don’t touch it: risk of
fire and/or burning.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
90
fig. 58
A0K0140m
fig. 59
A0K0087m
ASHTRAY fig. 60
The ashtray is a removable plastic box with spring loaded opening that can be fitted into the glass/can holder on the central console.
IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray as a waste paper basket: it might
catch fire in contact with cigarette stubs.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER fig. 62
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is located under the passenger seat.
NOTE On some versions, the fire extinguisher is fitted on the right
side of the boot inside a specific container.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
SUN VISORS fig. 61
These are located at the sides of the internal rearview mirror. They
may be positioned at the front and to the side.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
A courtesy mirror with light is fitted behind the visors. The light allows to use the mirror in poor visibility conditions. Lift the A cover
fig. 61 to access the mirror.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 61
A0K0113m
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 60
A0K0112m
fig. 62
A0K0212m
91
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
ELECTRIC SUN ROOF
Opening the sunroof
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Press button A-fig. 63 and hold it pressed: the front glass panel will
assume the spoiler position. Press button A again and operate the
control for longer than half a second to move the roof window to
an intermediate position (“Comfort” position).
The sun roof comprises two glass panels; the front one is mobile
and the rear one fixed. These are equipped with two sun blinds
(front and rear) that can be moved manually. With the sun roof
closed, the blinds can be placed in any position.
OPERATION
STARTING
AND DRIVING
The sunroof can be operated only with the ignition key turned to
MAR. The controls A and B-Fig. 63 on the front courtesy light trim,
operate the sun roof opening/closing functions.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Closing the sunroof
With the sunroof in the fully open position, press button B-fig. 62
and, if the button is operated for more than half a second, the front
roof glass with automatically assume the intermediate position
(comfort position).
If the button is operated again for about half a second the roof
will assume the spoiler position. Lastly, if the button B is pressed
again, the roof will assume the fully closed position.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
92
Press the opening control for longer than half a second to open the
roof entirely. The front panel can be stopped in an intermediate position by pressing button A again.
fig. 63
A0K0131m
Do not open the sun roof in the presence of snow
or ice: it may be damaged.
SUN CURTAINS
Grip the handle A-fig. 64 to open the curtain and pull in the direction of the arrow to achieve the required position. To close them,
carry out the procedure in reverse.
When leaving the car, always remove the key from
the ignition device to avoid the risk of injury due
to accidental operation of the sun roof; it presents
a risk to those left on board: improper use of the roof
can be dangerous. Before round during operation, always
check that no-one is at risk of being injured by the moving sunroof or by objects getting caught and dragged
by it.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
ANTI-PINCH SAFETY SYSTEM
The sun roof has an anti-pinch safety system capable of detecting
the presence of an object whilst the roof is closing; when this happens the system stops and the glass travel is immediately reversed.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 64
A0K0233m
93
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
INITIALISATION PROCEDURE
MAINTENANCE/EMERGENCY
The sunroof must be re-initialised after disconnecting the battery
or if the relevant protection fuse is blown.
In case of emergency or maintenance the roof can be moved manually when there is no power supply (opening/closing of the front
glass panel) by carrying out the following operations:
❍ remove cap A-fig. 65 set between the two sun curtains;
❍ take the Allen key B supplied, which is located in the on-board
documentation container or in the tool container in the luggage
compartment;
❍ introduce the key into housing C and turn it:
– clockwise to open the roof;
– anti-clockwise, to close the roof.
Proceed as follows:
❍ press button B-fig. 63 until the roof is entirely closed. Then
release the button;
❍ press B button and keep it pressed for at least 10 seconds
and/or until the glass panel clicks forwards. Release the button at this point;
❍ press button B within 5 seconds of this operation and keep it
pressed: the glass panel will complete a full opening and closing cycle. Only release the button at the end of this cycle.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
94
fig. 65
A0K0132m
DOORS
Unlocking the doors from the outside
Press button Ë on the remote control or turn the metal insert (located inside the key) in the driver’s door lock.
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING/UNLOCKING
FUNCTION
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Locking/unlocking the doors from the inside
Locking the doors from the outside
With the doors closed press button Á on the remote control or turn
the metal insert (located inside the key) in the driver’s door lock.
The LED over the button ≈ will light up to indicate that the
doors have been locked.
The door locking function is operated:
❍ with all the doors closed;
❍ with all the doors closed and boot open.
Press ≈. The button has an LED that indicates the state (locked
or unlocked) of the doors.
LED on: doors locked. Press the button ≈again to unlock all
doors and switch the LED off:
LED off: doors unlocked. Press the button ≈ again to lock
all doors. The doors will be locked only if all the doors are properly shut.
Once the doors have been locked via the remote control or the key
pawl, it will no longer be possible to unlock them by pressing button ≈.
IMPORTANT With the central locking function on, pull the inside
lever on the passenger’s door to unlock the door (the LED will stay
on). All doors will be unlocked if the inside lever on the driver’s
door is pulled.
IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when
the child lock is engaged.
If a power supply is not present (blown fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is, however, possible to lock the doors manually.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 66
A0K0145m
95
CHILD LOCKS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
This system prevents the rear doors from being opened from the
inside.
This device A-fig. 67 can be engaged only with rear doors open:
❍ position 1 - device engaged (door locked);
❍ position 2 - device not engaged (door may be opened from the
inside).
The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked remotely.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when
the child lock is engaged.
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for proper engagement by trying to open a
rear door with the internal handle.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
96
fig. 67
A0K0167m
DOOR LOCK EMERGENCY DEVICE
Front passenger door
The front passenger door has a device to lock it when there is no
current. To lock it, fit the metal insert of the ignition key in the seat
A-fig. 67a and move it upwards.
The door lock knob can be realigned (only when the battery charge
has been restored) as follows:
❍ press button Ë on the key;
❍ press ≈ on the instrument panel to lock/unlock the doors;
❍ open the front door by inserting the key in the pawl;
❍ pull the internal door handle.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Rear passenger door
The rear doors are fitted with an emergency device that allows
the doors to be locked when there is no current.
Proceed as follows:
❍ insert the metal insert on the ignition key in the seat B-fig. 67;
❍ turn the key anticlockwise and then remove it from the seat B.
If the child lock was engaged and the previously
described locking procedure carried out, operating
the internal handle will not open the door but will
only realign the door lock knobs. To open the door, the
outside handle must be used. The door central locking/unlocking button is not disabled by the engagement
of the emergency lock ≈.
IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse
blows, the luggage compartment opening/closing mechanism must
be reinitialised as follows:
❍ shut all the doors;
❍ press button Á on the key or door locking/unlocking button
≈ on the instrument panel;
❍ press button Ë on the key or door locking/unlocking button
≈ on the instrument panel.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 67a
A0K0275m
97
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
CONTROLS fig. 68
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
The window winders work with the ignition key at MAR and for
approximately three minutes after turning the key to STOP or extracting it and opening one of the front doors.
The control buttons are located in the door panels (the driver’s door
panel can be used to operate all the windows).
An anti-pinch device is operated when the front and rear windows
are wound up.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Front door driver’s side
A. opening/closing left hand front window; “continuous automatic” operation during window opening/closing stage;
B. opening/closing right hand front window; “continuous automatic” operation during window opening/closing stage;
C. enabling/disabling of rear door electric window controls;
D. opening/closing left hand rear window (for versions/markets,
where provided); “continuous automatic” operation during window opening/closing stage;
E. opening/closing right hand rear window (for versions/markets,
where provided); “continuous automatic” operation during window opening/closing stage;
Press the buttons to open/close the required window. When one
of the two buttons is pressed briefly, the window moves in stages;
if the button is held down, “continuous automatic” operation is activated both for closing and opening. If the button is pressed again
the window will stop in its current position. Holding the button
pressed for a few seconds, the window automatically raises or lowers (only with key on MAR).
Front door passenger’s side/rear doors
(for versions/markets, where provided)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
On the passenger side front door control panel, and on some versions also on the rear doors, buttons F-fig. 68 are provided to control the relevant windows
CONTENTS
98
fig. 68
A0K0067m
Anti-pinch device
The car is equipped with an anti-pinch safety device for the upwards
motion of the windows.
The windows are fitted with an anti-pinch safety system that detects the presence of an obstacle when they are closing and cuts
in by stopping the window and reversing it according to the position of the window. This device is also useful when the windows
are activated accidentally by children on board the car.
The anti-pinch function is active both during manual and automatic operation of the electric windows. Following the intervention of
the anti-pinch system, the window travel is immediately interrupted and subsequently reversed until the lower end of travel is
reached. The window cannot be operated in any way during this
time.
IMPORTANT If the anti-pinch protection intervenes 5 consecutive
times within a minute or is faulty, the automatic closing operation
of the window is inhibited, only allowing it in steps of half a second; the button is released for the subsequent manoeuvre.
Open the concerned window to restore correct operation of the system.
IMPORTANT With ignition key at STOP or removed, the electric windows remain active for about 3 minutes and are deactivated the
moment a door is opened.
IMPORTANT On some versions when the Ë button on the remote
control is pressed for longer than 2 seconds the windows will open,
whilst if the Á button is pressed for longer than 2 seconds the
windows will close.
The system conforms to the 2000/4/EC standard
concerning the safety of passengers leaning out of
the passenger compartment.
Incorrect use of the electric windows may be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that
no passenger is at risk of being injured directly by
the moving window or by objects getting caught in or dragged
by the window. When leaving the car, always remove the key
from the ignition device to avoid the risk of injury due to accidental operation of the electric windows. This is a danger to
the people still on board.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
99
Electric window system initialisation
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
100
The system must be re-initialised after disconnecting the battery
or if the relevant protection fuse is blown.
Initialisation procedure:
❍ fully close the window manually to initialise;
❍ after the window has reached the upper end of travel, hold the
up button pressed for at least one second.
IMPORTANT For versions/markets where provided, following the
disconnection of the power supply (replacing or disconnecting the
battery or replacing the protection fuse for the electric window control units), the automatic setting for the electric windows must be
reset.
The reset operation should be carried out with the doors closed
according to the following procedure:
1. completely lower the driver-side window and keep the button
pressed for at least 3 seconds once the end of travel position
has been reached (lower end stop);
2. completely raise the driver-side window and keep the button
pressed for at least 3 seconds once the end of travel position
has been reached (upper end stop);
3. repeat stages 1 and 2 also for the passenger’s window
4. check that the initialisation has taken place correctly by checking the automatic operation of the windows.
BOOT
Emergency opening from the inside
The boot is unlocked electrically operated and this is deactivated
when the car is in motion.
OPENING
Proceed as follows:
❍ remove the rear head restraints and completely fold back the
seats (see the paragraph on “Expanding the boot”);
❍ press lever A-fig. 70.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
When unlocked, the boot can be opened from outside by pressing
the electric logo fig. 69 until a click is heard or by pressing R button on the remote control.
The direction indicators and internal light will blink twice when
the boot is opened: the light will go out automatically when the
boot is closed. If the boot is left open, the light will go out automatically after several minutes.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 69
A0K0068m
fig. 70
A0K0069m
101
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
CLOSING
BOOT INITIALISATION
To close, lower the tailgate and press down near the lock until
you hear it click. Handles A-fig. 71 are provided on the inside of
the tailgate to help grasping to close the tailgate.
IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse
blows, the boot opening/closing mechanism must be reinitialised
as follows:
❍ close all the doors and the boot;
❍ press button Á on the remote control;
❍ press button Ë on the remote control.
IMPORTANT Before closing the boot make sure that you have the
keys with you because the boot will be locked automatically.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
102
fig. 71
A0K0181m
EXPANDING THE BOOT
Removing the parcel shelf
The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) or totally extended by
splitting the rear seat. See the descriptions in “Removing the
parcel shelf” and “Folding back the seats” paragraphs for how to
expand the boot.
Proceed as follows:
❍ free the ends of the two links A-fig. 72 supporting the parcel
shelf B, releasing eyelets C from supporting pins D;
❍ release the pins A-fig. 73 on the outer side of the shelf, and then
remove the shelf B by pulling it outwards.
❍ after removal, the parcel shelf can be loaded sideways into the
boot or placed between the front seat backrests and the folded-back rear seats (with the luggage compartment completely expanded).
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 72
A0K0070m
fig. 73
A0K0182m
103
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Folding back the seats
Repositioning the rear seat
Proceed as follows:
❍ raise the head restraints to the maximum height, press both
buttons A and B -fig. 74 to the side of the two supports, then
remove the head restraints by sliding them upwards;
❍ move the seat belts making sure that they are correctly extended and not twisted;
❍ lift the lever A-fig. 75 to fold the left or right portion of the backrest and then accompany the backrest and the cushion (a red
strip B will appear when the lever A if lifted) .
Move the seat belts making sure that they are correctly extended
and not twisted.
Lift up the backrest and push it back until a click is heard for the
engagement mechanism. Make sure that the red strip on levers
A-fig. 75. is no longer visible; if it is, this indicates that the backrest has not engaged. Reposition the head restraints into their housings.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
104
fig. 74
A0K0065m
fig. 75
A0K0110m
SECURING YOUR LOAD
Two hooks A-fig. 76 are provided in the boot for firmly securing the
load and two hooks are provided on the rear crossmember B.
IMPORTANT The maximum load which can be secured to a single
hook is 100 kg.
Heavy, unsecured baggage may cause severe injury
to passengers in case of an accident.
If you are travelling in areas with few refuelling
stations and you want to transport fuel in a spare
tank, comply with the law by using only an approved, suitably secured tank. In the event of a collision
the fire risk is increased all the same.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
BAG HOOKS
Bag hooks are also provided inside the boot.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CARGO NET (for versions/markets, where provided)
This is useful for correctly arranging the load and/or transporting
light materials. The cargo net is available in Lineaccessori Alfa
Romeo.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 76
A0K0169m
105
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
BONNET
CLOSING
OPENING
Proceed as follows:
❍ pull lever A-fig. 77 in the direction indicated by the arrow;
❍ operate lever B in the sense indicated by the arrow and open the
bonnet.
IMPORTANT Two side gas shock absorbers are provided to assist
opening the bonnet. Do not tamper with the shock absorber and
accompany the bonnet while lifting it.
IMPORTANT Before lifting up the bonnet make sure that the windscreen wipers are in the rest position and not operational.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT Always check that the bonnet is closed properly to avoid
it opening while the car is travelling.
For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be perfectly closed while travelling. Make sure that the
bonnet is perfectly closed and that the lock is engaged. If you discover whilst driving that the lock is not
fully engaged, stop immediately and close the bonnet in
the correct manner.
Perform these operations only when the car is stationary.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
106
Lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres from the engine compartment and let it drop. Make sure that the bonnet is
completely closed and not only fastened by the safety catch by trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, open the bonnet and
repeat the procedure. Do not simply press it.
fig. 77
A0K0116m
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK
The attachments A-fig. 78 are located in the areas illustrated in the
figure and can only be reached with the doors open.
A roof rack/ski rack specific for the car is available from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
After having travelled several kilometres check that
the attachment fixing screws are still securely fastened.
Never exceed the maximum permitted load
(see the “Technical Specifications” chapter) .
Distribute the load uniformly and when driving
take into consideration the increased sensitivity
to cross winds.
Always obey local legislation regarding maximum
load size.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 78
A0K0117m
107
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
HEADLIGHTS
Adjusting headlight alignment
ADJUSTING THE LIGHT BEAM
The correct orientation of the headlights is important for the driver’s comfort and safety as well as for all other road users. It is also a specific rule of the highway code.
The headlights must be correctly directed to ensure the best visibility conditions for all drivers. To check and, if necessary, adjust
the alignment contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR
This device works with the ignition key in the MAR position and the
dipped headlights on.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Press Ò and to adjust (fig. 79). The display located on the instrument panel provides a visual indication of the adjusted position.
Position 0 – one or two passengers in the front seats.
Position 1 – 4 passengers.
Position 2 – 4 passengers + load in the boot.
Position 3 – driver + maximum permitted load in the boot.
IMPORTANT Check the adjustment every time the load carried
changes.
IMPORTANT If the vehicle is equipped with Bi-xenon headlights,
headlight alignment is carried out automatically and therefore buttons Ò and are not present.
FOG LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS WHEN ABROAD
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The dipped beam headlights are aligned to comply with the regulations of the country of purchase. When driving in countries with
a different driving direction, to avoid blinding the drivers travelling
in the opposite direction, it is necessary to cover the areas of the
beam according to the provisions of the Highway Code of the country you are driving in.
CONTENTS
108
fig. 79
A0K0094m
ABS SYSTEM
ABS is an integral part of the braking system, which prevents the
wheels from locking when braking, makes the most of road grip
and gives the best control when performing emergency braking under difficult road conditions.
The EBD system (Electronic Braking Force Distribution) completes
the system, allowing the brake force to be distributed between the
front and rear wheels.
IMPORTANT For maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 500 km is needed: during this period it is
better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
The brake pedal pulsates slightly and the system gets noisier: it
means that the speed should be altered to suit the type of road surface.
If the ABS intervenes, it means you have almost
reached the limit of grip between the tyres and the
road surface: slow down to make sure you can use
the available grip.
The ABS gets the most out of the available grip,
but it cannot increase it; you must therefore always
take care when driving on skiddy roads. Do not
take any unnecessary risks.
When the ABS intervenes and you notice the brake
pedal pulsating, do not be afraid to keep the pedal pushed down. This will help you to stop in the
shortest distance possible, depending on the road conditions.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
109
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
VDC SYSTEM
(Vehicle Dynamics Control)
This is an electronic system that controls vehicle stability in the
event of tyre grip loss, helping maintain directional control. The system is capable of recognising potentially dangerous situations in
terms of the stability and intervenes automatically on the brakes
in a differentiated manner for the four wheels in order to provide
a stabilizing torque.
The VDC, in turn, includes the following systems:
❍ Hill Holder
❍ ASR
❍ Brake Assist
❍ MSR
❍ CBC
❍ “ELECTRONIC Q2” (“E-Q2”)
❍ DST
❍ RAB
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
This is signalled by warning light á blinking on the instrument
panel to inform the driver that stability and grip conditions are
critical.
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
CONTENTS
110
The VDC system switches on automatically each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM
This system is an integral part of the VDC system and it is provided
to facilitate starting on slopes.
It is activated automatically in the following instances:
❍ uphill: car standing on a road with a gradient of more than 5%,
engine on, brake pedals pressed and gearbox in neutral or gear
(other than reverse) engaged;
❍ downhill: car at a standstill on a road with a gradient higher
than 5%, engine running, brake pedal pressed and reverse gear
engaged.
When setting off the VDC system control unit maintains the braking pressure at the wheels until the engine torque required for departure is reached or for approximately 2 seconds, allowing your
right foot to be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
If the car does not start off after this time, the system will deactivate automatically by gradually releasing the brake force. A noise
may be heard: this means that the car is about to start moving.
IMPORTANT the Hill Holder system should not be used as a handbrake. Do not leave the vehicle without having engaged the handbrake, switched off the engine and engaged a gear.
ASR SYSTEM (AntiSlip Regulation)
It is an integral part of the VDC system. It intervenes automatically if one or both of the drive wheels is slipping, there is a loss in
grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning), acceleration on slippery, snowcovered or icy surfaces, etc.
Depending on how slippery the road is, two different control systems are activated:
❍ if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR intervenes
reducing the power transmitted by the engine;
❍ if the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, the ASR
intervenes automatically braking the wheel that is slipping.
In order for the ESP and ASR systems to operate
correctly, it is essential that the tyres are of the
same brand and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the specified type, brand and size.
If the space saver wheel is used, the VDC system
keeps operating. Be aware however that the space
saver wheel, being smaller than the original wheel,
provides less grip.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
The performance of the VDC and ASR systems
should not encourage the driver to take unnecessary risks. Your driving style should always take
road conditions, visibility and traffic into account. The driver is always ultimately responsible for road safety.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
111
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
112
BRAKE ASSIST
(emergency braking assistance)
The system, which cannot be turned off, recognises emergency
braking (on the basis of the brake pedal operating speed) and
speeding up the response of the braking system. The Brake
Assist function is deactivated in the event of VDC system fault.
MSR SYSTEM
(Motor Schleppmoment Regelung)
This system is an integral part of the ABS, that intervenes, if there
is a sudden change to a lower gear, restoring torque to the engine,
thereby preventing excessive drive at the drive wheels which, especially in poor grip conditions, could lead to a loss in stability.
CBC SYSTEM (Cornering Braking Control)
This system improves the distribution of the braking pressure at the
four wheels (to fully exploit the grip available on the ground) when
braking round bends when the ABS intervenes. This improves stopping distances and above all vehicle stability when cornering.
“ELECTRONIC Q2” SYSTEM (“E-Q2”)
The “Electronic Q2” system uses the braking system to create an
effect similar to a limited slip differential.
The front braking circuit, when accelerating around a corner, acts
on the inside wheel to increase the drive to the outside wheel (increased load), dynamically and continuously distributing the torque
between the front drive wheels according to driving and road conditions.
The system, combined with Mc Pherson front suspension, allows
particularly effective, sporty driving.
DST SYSTEM (Dynamic Steering Torque)
This function integrates Dual Pinion active steering into the operation of VDC. For particular manoeuvres, VDC controls the steering
to actuate a steering torque and assist the driver in the best possible way. The system operates the brakes and steering in a coordinated manner to increase the suspension and safety level of the
car as a whole. The steering provides addition torque on the steering wheel.
RAB SYSTEM (Ready Alert Brake)
(“Dynamic” mode only)
By pre-approaching the brake pads (front and rear) after rapid accelerator release, this function provides prompter braking and reduces stopping distance.
“Alfa DNA” SYSTEM
(Dynamic control system)
DRIVING MODES
This device allows, using switch A-fig. 80 (on the central tunnel),
three response modes to be selected according to driving style
and road conditions:
❍ d = Dynamic (for sporty driving)
❍ n = Normal (normal driving mode)
❍ a = All Weather (driving mode for poor grip conditions, i.e. rain
and snow on the road)
The device also acts on the dynamic vehicle control systems (engine, steering, VDC system, instrument panel).
When the lever A-fig. 80 is moved to “d” position, the activation
of “Dynamic” mode is confirmed by a temporary variation in the
brightness (flashing) of the instrument panel.
Switch A-fig. 80 is a monostable switch, i.e. it always remains in the
central position. The selected driving mode is indicated by the corresponding LED coming on in the panel and by an indication on the reconfigurable multifunction display, as illustrated below:
Dynamic mode
(display image available for
versions/markets where
provided)
All Weather mode
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
A0K0010m
A0K0009m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
“Normal” mode
When “Normal” mode is selected, no messages or symbols are
shown on the display.
VDC and ASR: operating thresholds set for normal comfort level for normal driving conditions.
Steering tuning: functions aimed at providing comfort in normal conditions of use.
DST: Standard braking control coordinated with ABS/VDC.
Standard control over lateral acceleration.
Oversteer compensation: a slight pulse on the steering wheel
encourages the driver to carry out the most appropriate manoeuvre.
fig. 80
A0K0072m
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Engine: Standard responsiveness
113
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
TURNING “Dynamic” MODE ON/OFF
Electronic Q2: improves traction and reduces understeer in acceleration while exiting curves.
On
Move lever A-fig. 80 upwards (to the letter “d”) and hold in this
position for 0.5 seconds until the corresponding LED lights up or
the word “Dynamic” appears on the display (see figures). The
switch A will go back to central position after having been released.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
114
RAB: pre-positioning of the brake pads (front and rear) following
a rapid release of the accelerator pedal to reduce braking
times, shorten stopping distances and improve the feel of
the brake pedal.
The activation of the Dynamic mode is also shown by the change
in the instrument panel lighting that, after decreasing, reaches
the highest luminosity and then returns to the previously set values.
Off
A0K1055g
A0K1225g
VDC and ASR: intervention thresholds that allow more enjoyable, sportier driving whilst guaranteeing stability in the event of loss of control. Improves traction whilst accelerating on bends.
To turn “Dynamic” mode off and go back to “Normal” mode, move
the lever as described above once again. In this case, the LED corresponding to “Normal” mode will light up and the words “Normal on” will appear on the reconfigurable multifunction display
(see figure).
Steering tuning: sports mode operation.
DST:Standard brake control coordinated with ABS/VDC.
Standard control over lateral acceleration
Oversteer compensation adapted to VDC/ASR intervention
thresholds: a slight pulse on the steering wheel encourage
the driver to carry the most appropriate manoeuvre.
Engine: Prompter response + Overboost to maximise torque (for
versions/markets, where provided).
A0K1052g
TURNING “All Weather” MODE ON/OFF
On
On
Move switch A-fig. 80 downwards (to the letter “a”) and hold in
this position for 0.5 seconds until the corresponding LED lights up
or the word “All Weather” appears on the display (see figures).
A0K1180g
A0K1226g
VDC and ASR: intervention thresholds to ensure maximum safety and control even in critical conditions (e.g. rain,
snow, etc.).
Steering wheel tuning: Standard comfort.
DST: Higher brake control coordinated with ABS/VDC.
Standard control over lateral acceleration
Oversteer compensation adapted to VDC/ASR intervention
thresholds: a slight pulse on the steering wheel encourages the driver to carry the most appropriate manoeuvre.
To disengage “All Weather” mode and return to “Normal”, carry
out the same procedure described for“Dynamic” mode, however
moving lever A-fig. 80 to “a”.
IMPORTANT
❍ It is not possible to go directly from “Dynamic” mode to “All
Weather” mode and vice versa. You must always first go back
to “Normal” mode and then select the other mode.
❍ “Dynamic” mode was engaged when the engine was switched
off, the next time it is started “Normal” mode is automatically selected. If, however, “All Weather” or “Normal”, was engaged when the engine was switched off, the selected mode
is maintained the next time it is started.
❍ “Dynamic” mode cannot be engaged at speeds of above 110
km/h.
❍ In the event of system failure or a fault with lever A-fig. 80,
no driving modes can be selected. The display will show a warning message.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine: Standard response
CONTENTS
115
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
START&STOP SYSTEM
OPERATING MODES
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Engine stopping mode
The Start&Stop system automatically stops the engine whenever
the car is stationary and starts it again when the driver wants to
move off. This improves the efficiency of the vehicle by reducing
fuel consumption, the emission of harmful gases and noise pollution.
With the car at a standstill, the engine stops with the gearbox in
neutral and the clutch released.
The system is active every time the engine is started.
Symbol U fig. 81 appears on the display when the engine stops.
NOTE The engine can only be stopped automatically after a speed
of about 10 km/h is reached, to prevent the engine from being
repeatedly stopped when driving at walking pace.
Engine restarting mode
Press the clutch pedal to restart the engine.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
116
fig. 81
A0K0163m
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF MANUALLY
FAILED ENGINE CUT-OUT CONDITIONS
Press T fig. 82 on the dashboard to turn the system on and off
manually.
When the system is operating, due to comfort, emission control
and safety reasons, the engine does not stop in some conditions,
among which:
❍ engine still cold;
❍ very cold outside temperature;
❍ battery not sufficiently charged;
❍ heated rear windscreen on;
❍ windscreen wipers working at maximum speed;
❍ particulate filter regeneration in progress (diesel engines only);
❍ driver’s door not shut;
❍ driver’s seat belt not fastened
❍ reverse gear engaged (for example, for parking manoeuvres);
❍ for versions equipped with dual zone automatic climate control
system (for versions/markets, where provided), if an adequate
level of thermal comfort has not been reached or MAX-DEF function activation;
❍ during the first period of use, to initialize the system;
Turning the Start&Stop system on
A message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop system
is on. In this condition, LED A-fig. 82 located over button T is off.
Turning the Start&Stop on
❍ Versions with multifunction display: a message will appear on
the display when the Start&Stop system is off.
❍ Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: symbol T
and a message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop
system is off.
LED A-fig. 82 is on when the system is off.
In these cases, a message is shown on the display and the symbol U will blink (the latter for versions/markets, where provided).
If climate comfort is to be favoured, the
Start&Stop system can be disabled, for a continuous operation of the climate control system.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 82
A0K0121m
117
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
118
RESTARTING CONDITIONS
Notes
For reasons of comfort, limiting harmful emissions and safety purposes, the power unit can restart automatically without any action
on behalf of the driver if certain conditions are met, including:
❍ battery not sufficiently charged;
❍ windscreen wipers working at maximum speed;
❍ low braking system vacuum, e.g. following the brake pedal being pressed repeatedly;
❍ car in motion, for example when driving on hilly roads;
❍ stopping the engine using Start&Stop longer than approximately 3 minutes;
❍ for versions equipped with dual zone automatic climate control
system (for versions/markets, where provided), if an adequate
level of thermal comfort has not been reached or MAX-DEF function activation;
If the clutch is not pressed, after 3 minutes from the engine stopping, the engine can be restarted only using the ignition key.
With gear engaged, the automatic engine restarting is possible only by fully pressing the clutch pedal. This operation is indicated to
the driver by means of a message on the display and by symbol
U blinking (the latter for versions/markets, where provided).
In cases when the engine stops and this is not desired, due for
example to the clutch pedal being released sharply with a gear
engaged, if the Start&Stop system is activated, the engine can
be restarted by fully depressing the clutch pedal or by placing the
gear lever in neutral
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
STORING THE CAR
When the engine is stopped by the Start&Stop system, if the driver releases his/her seat belt and opens the driver’s or passenger’s
door, the engine can be restarted only using the ignition key.
In the case of storage, special care must be taken to disconnect the
battery electrical power supply.
This condition is indicated to the driver by means of a buzzer and
by the symbol U blinking on the display (with a message, for
versions/markets, where provided).
ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
If, as a result of the engine automatic restarting, the driver does not
carry out any action on the vehicle for over 3 minutes, the Start&Stop
system stops the engine once and for all, to prevent fuel consumption. In these cases, the engine can be restarted only using the ignition key.
Proceed as follows: detach the connector A-fig. 83 (by pressing button B) from sensor C for monitoring the status of the battery installed on the battery negative pole D. This sensor should never
be disconnected from the pole except if the battery is replaced.
In case of battery replacement, always contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. Replace the battery using a new one of the same type (HEAVY
DUTY) and having the same specifications.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NOTE In any case, it is possible to keep the engine running by deactivating the Start&Stop system.
IRREGULAR OPERATION
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
In the event of malfunction, the Start&Stop system is deactivated.
The driver is informed of the fault by the flashing U symbol (versions with multifunction display) or j symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display). For versions/markets, where
provided, a message is also displayed. In this case, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 83
A0K0179m
119
EMERGENCY STARTING
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
When jump starting, never connect the negative lead (–) of the
auxiliary battery to the negative pole A-fig. 84 of the car battery,
but rather to an engine/gearbox earth point.
SAFETY
Before opening the engine hood, make sure that
the engine is off and that the ignition key is in STOP
position. Follow the instructions on the plate affixed on the front crossmember (fig. 85). You are advised
to extract the key when other people are inside the car.
Remove the ignition key or turn it to the STOP position before leaving the car. During refuelling, make sure that the
engine is off and the key is in STOP position.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
120
fig. 84
A0K0180m
fig. 85
A0K0224m
EOBD SYSTEM
(European On Board Diagnosis)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The aim of the EOBD (European On Board Diagnosis) system is to:
❍ to monitor system efficiency;
❍ indicate an increase in emissions;
❍ to warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.
The car also has a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced
with appropriate tools, which makes it possible to read the error
codes stored in the electronic control units together with a series
of specific parameters for engine operation and diagnosis. This
check can also be carried out by the traffic police.
IMPORTANT After eliminating a fault, to check the system completely, Alfa Romeo Authorized Services are obliged to run tests
and, if necessary, road tests which may also call for a long journey.
DUAL PINION ACTIVE STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR and the engine started. The steering allows the force required at the steering wheel
to be adjusted to suit driving conditions. The different power assistance modes can be selected via the d,n,a positions of the"Alfa
DNA System" lever (see paragraph entitled "Alfa DNA System").
IMPORTANT The steering system will need to be initialised after
disconnecting the battery. A warning light will come on to indicate
this. Simply turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the
other or simply drive in a straight line for a few hundred metres.
Under no circumstances should aftermarket operations be carried out involving steering system
or steering column modifications (e.g. installation
of anti-theft device). This could negatively affect performance and safety, invalidate the warranty, cause serious
safety problems and also result in non-compliance of the
car with type-approval requirements.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
121
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
CAR RADIO SET-UP
Fit the car radio in the compartment A-fig. 86 which can be reached
by pressing the two tabs B located in the compartment itself: the
power wires are located in the compartment.
(for versions/markets, where provided)
If no car radio was requested at the time of purchase, the vehicle
is provided with a compartment on the dashboard fig. 86.
The radio set-up is composed of:
❍ car radio power supply cables, front and rear loudspeakers and
an aerial;
❍ radio compartment;
❍ aerial on the roof.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
122
fig. 86
A0K0134m
When connecting a car radio to the radio wiring
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to prevent
any faults from occurring that might compromise
the safety of your car.
PORTABLE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
SETUP (for versions/markets, where provided)
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
On cars equipped with the Blue&Me™ system, a setup for installing a Blue&Me™ TomTom® portable navigation system may
be provided (optional). The system is available from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
Electric and electronic devices installed after buying the car in the
context of after-sales service must carry the following label: e CE.
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceiving devices provided that they are installed by a specialised centre according to rules of good engineering practice in compliance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Install the navigation system by inserting the specific support bracket into the housing shown in fig. 87.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow the car on the road if devices have been fitted which modify the features of the car. This
may also invalidate the warranty if faults occur that are either directly or indirectly related to the installation of these devices.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused
by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 87
A0K0143m
123
RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND CELLULAR PHONES
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
PARKING SENSORS
Radio transmitting equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios,
amateur radio etc.) shall not be used inside the car unless a separate aerial is mounted on the roof.
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SAFETY
IMPORTANT The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without a separate aerial) may cause the vehicle electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers’ health.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
In addition, transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car body. As far as the use of
EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), follow the instructions for use provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.
The parking sensors are located on the rear bumper fig. 88 and
their function is to inform the driver, through an intermittent beeping, of the presence of obstacles behind the car.
TURNING THE SENSORS ON
The sensors are turned on when reverse gear is engaged. As the
distance from the obstacle behind the car decreases, the beeping
becomes more frequent.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
124
fig. 88
A0K0060m
DISPLAY INDICATIONS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the sensor is activated, the "Reconfigurable multifunctional
display" (for versions/markets where provided) shows the screen
illustrated in fig. 88a; the information about the presence of and
distance from the obstacle is given by the buzzer and also by a
visual indication on the instrument panel display. If there are several obstacles, the closest one is indicated.
❍ remains constant if the distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle remains unchanged, whilst if this situation occurs for
the side sensors, the signal is interrupted after about 3 seconds,
for example, to prevent signals in the case of manoeuvres alongside walls.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
IMPORTANT The volume of the audible signal can be adjusted through the option "Warnings volume" of the "Set-Up menu".
SAFETY
OPERATION WITH TRAILER
BUZZER WARNINGS
When reverse gear is engaged a buzzer warning is automatically
activated if there is an obstacle within the range of operation.
The acoustic signal:
❍ increases as the distance between the car and the obstacle decreases;
❍ becomes continuous when the distance between the car and
the obstacle is less that 30 cm and stops immediately if the
distance increases;
Parking sensor operation is automatically turned off when the trailer electric cable plug is fitted into the car tow hook socket. The sensors are automatically enabled again when the trailer cable plug
is removed.
The sensor must be free of mud, dirt, snow or ice
in order for the system to work. Be careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors while cleaning them.
Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors should
be washed using clean water with the addition of car shampoo if necessary. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapour jet/high pressure washing nozzles at a distance of at least 10 cm from the sensors.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 88a
A0K0059m
125
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
For repainting the bumpers or retouching the paintwork around the sensors contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services. Incorrect application of paint
may compromise the operation of the parking sensors.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
126
The ultimate responsibility when parking and carrying out other dangerous manoeuvres still rests
with the driver. When carrying out such manoeuvres, always ensure that the manoeuvring area is free
of people (particularly children) and animals. Parking sensors are designed to assist drivers; however, you must always concentrate fully during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even if carried out at low speeds.
GENERAL WARNINGS
During parking manoeuvres, pay the utmost attention to any obstacles that could be located above or below the sensors.
Sometimes, objects located close to the rear part of the car may
not be detected by the system and may damage the car or become
damaged themselves.
Here below are some conditions that may influence the performance of the parking system:
❍ Reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistance system performance could be due to the presence on
the surface of the sensor of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint.
❍ the sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle (echo noise) due
to mechanical noises, for example when washing the vehicle,
in case of rain, strong wind, hail.
❍ the signals sent by the sensors can also be altered by the presence of ultrasound devices (e.g. pneumatic brake systems or
pneumatic drills) near the car;
❍ sensor performance can also be influenced by the position of
the sensors. For example by a change in the ride setting (caused
by the wear of the shock absorbers, suspension), overloading
the car and carrying out specific tuning operations that require
the car to be lowered;
❍ the detection of obstacles at the top part of the vehicle may
not be guaranteed because the system detects obstacles that
could cause an impact with the vehicle in the bottom part.
REFUELLING THE CAR
Switch off the engine before refuelling.
PETROL ENGINES
Only use unleaded petrol. The petrol octane rating (RON) must not
be lower than 95.
In order to prevent damage to the catalytic converter never introduce even the smallest amount of leaded petrol, even in the event
of an emergency.
DIESEL ENGINES
Only use diesel fuel compliant with European specification EN590.
The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine
beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, depending on the damage caused.
Operation at low temperatures
If the outside temperature is very low, the diesel thickens due to
the formation of paraffin clots with consequent defective operation
of the fuel supply system.
In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel are distributed according to the season: summer type, winter type and
arctic type (cold, mountain areas). If refuelling with diesel fuel
whose features are not suitable for the temperature of use, it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive with the fuel, in the proportions shown on the container. Pour the additive into the tank
before the fuel.
When parking or storing the car for a long time in the mountains
or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel using locally available fuel.
In this case, it is also advisable to keep the tank over 50% full.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
127
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
FUEL FILLER CAP
Closing
The fuel cap is unlocked when the central locking system is released
and automatically locked when the central locking system is applied.
Release the cap B from the device D and insert it in its housing.
Tighten the cap in a clockwise direction until one or more clicks are
heard. Finally, close the flap A and check that is it correctly locked.
To open
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Press the flap A-fig. 89 to release it and reach the fuel filler cap
B. Then press the cap B and turn it anticlockwise.
The cap has a loss prevention device C which secures it to the flap
so that it cannot be lost. Attach the cap to device D during refuelling.
How to open the flap in an emergency
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The hermetic seal may cause a slight increase in pressure in the
tank. A suction noise when you release the cap is therefore entirely
normal.
Do not place naked flames or lit cigarettes near
to the fuel filler: fire risk. Keep your face away
from the fuel tank opening to avoid breathing in
harmful vapours.
In case of emergency, pull the cord A-fig. 90 on the right-hand side
of the boot to open the fuel flap.
Pull the cord to release the lock. Then press the flap to open it.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
128
fig. 89
A0K0115m
fig. 90
A0K0222m
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The devices for reducing petrol engine emissions are the following:
catalytic converter, lambda sensors and anti-evaporation system.
This is a mechanical filter, fitted in the exhaust system, which almost completely eliminates carbon particle emissions.
The following devices are used for reducing diesel fuel engine emissions: oxidising catalytic converter, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
and particulate filter (DPF).
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
The catalytic converter and particulate filter (DPF)
reach very high temperatures during operation.
Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine
needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
129
blank page
SAFETY
SEAT BELTS
Never press button C-fig. 92 when travelling.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
USING THE SEAT BELTS
Wear the belt keeping the chest straight and rested against the backrest. To fasten the seat belts, hold tongue A-fig. 92 and insert it
into buckle B, until the locking click is heard.
If the seatbelt jams when pulling it out, let it rewind for a short
stretch and then pull it out again without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button C. Guide the seat belt
with your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.
SAFETY
The rear seat is fitted with inertia seat belts with three anchor points
and a reel. Fasten the rear seat belts as shown in fig. 93
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 92
A0K0160m
fig. 93
A0K0161m
131
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Remember that, in the event of a violent collision,
backseat passengers not wearing seat belts represent a serious danger to the front-seat passengers as well as to themselves.
IMPORTANT The backrest is correctly secured when the “red band”
B-fig. 94 in the backrest lowering levers A disappears. This red band
indicates that the backrest is not secured.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
132
fig. 94
A0K0110m
IMPORTANT When putting the back seats back to their normal position, make sure the seat belts are positioned so they are ready
to use.
Make sure the backrest is properly secured on both
sides (red bands B-fig. 94 not visible) to prevent it
from moving forward in the event of sharp braking, which may cause injuries to passengers.
SBR SYSTEM
(Seat Belt Reminder)
This system comprises of an acoustic signal, which in conjunction
with the < warning light flashing on the instrument panel display,
warns the driver and front passenger if their seat belts have not
been fastened.
On some versions there is also a panel (provided as an alternative
to the warning lights on the instrument panel) located above the
rear-view mirror fig. 95, which warns the front and back seat passengers via acoustic and visual signals if their seat belts have not
been fastened.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to deactivate this system
permanently. The SBR system can only be reactivated via the display Set Up Menu (see chapter “Knowing your car”).
The red and green warning lights work as follows fig. 95:
❍ 1 = front left seat (this indicates the driver’s seat state in lefthand drive versions)
❍ 2 = rear left seat (passenger)
❍ 3 = rear middle seat (passenger)
❍ 4 = rear right seat (passenger)
❍ 5 = front right seat (this indicates the passenger seat state in
right-hand drive versions)
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 95
A0K0075m
133
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
134
Front seats (warning light no. 1 = driver and
no. 5 = passenger)
Rear seats (warning light no. 2, no. 3
and no. 4)
Driver
If the driver is the only occupant and the seat belt is not fastened,
when 20 km/h is exceeded or when travelling at a speed from 10
to 20 km/h for longer than 5 seconds, an acoustic signal sequence
will be started (front seats) consisting of a tone for 6 seconds followed by a 90 second beep. The warning light will blink. Once the
cycle is complete, the warning lights stay on with a fixed light until the car is turned off. The acoustic signal will be interrupted immediately when the driver’s seat belt is fastened and the warning
light will turn green.
The signalling cycle is run only when any rear seat belt is unfastened (blinking red). In this condition, the warning light referred
to the seat belt which has been unfastened will start blinking (red)
for approximately 30 seconds. An acoustic signal will also sound.
If the seat belt is again unfastened when the car is in motion, the
acoustic signal and the red warning light blinking resume as described previously.
Passenger
A similar solution applies for the front passenger, with the difference that the warning light turns green and the signal is interrupted
also when the passenger leaves the car.
If both front seat belts are unfastened with the car in motion a few
seconds apart, the acoustic signal will refer to the most recent event
while the two warning lights will issue a visual signal independently.
The visual signal (blinking red) will start and end independently for
each warning light if several seat belts are unfastened. The visual
signal will turn green after the corresponding seat has been fastened.
The rear seat warning lights will go out, regardless of the state of
the belt (red or green) approximately 30 seconds after the last signal.
WARNINGS
All warning lights will remain off if all the seat belts (front and rear)
are already fastened when the key it turned to MAR.
All the warning lights will come on when at least one belt changes
from fastened to unfastened status or vice versa.
PRETENSIONERS
The car is equipped with front seat belt pretensioners, which draw
back the seat belts by several centimetres in the event of a strong
frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat
belts to the occupant’s bodies before the retention action begins.
It is evident that the pretensioners have operated when the belt
withdraws toward the reel.
This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner (in the kick
plate area). Its activation is signalled by the shortening of the metal cable.
A small amount of smoke may be produced when the pretensioners cut in. This smoke is not toxic and does not indicate a fire.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioner, wear the seat belt, keeping it close to
the chest and pelvis.
The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or lubrication.
Anything that modifies its original conditions invalidates its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.),
the device has been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase protection in case of an accident, the front seat belt
reels are equipped with a device which modulates the force acting on the chest and shoulders during the belt restraining action
in the event of a frontal impact.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
The pretensioner can be used only once. Once it
has activated contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have it replaced. See the label inside the
glove box to check the expiration date of the device: go
to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services when it is time to replace it.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C for a maximum of six
hours) in the area around the pretensioners may
damage or deploy them. These devices are not affected
by vibrations caused by uneven road surfaces or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to intervene.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
135
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING
THE SEAT BELTS
Respect and ensure that all the other occupants of the car respect
the local laws in force regarding the use of seat belts. Always
fasten the seat belts before starting off.
Seat belts must also be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for them and the unborn
child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very
low down so that it passes under the abdomen fig. 96.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
The seat belt must not be twisted. The upper part must cross the
shoulder and the chest diagonally. The lower part must adhere to
the hips fig. 97, not to the abdomen. Do not use devices (clips,
etc.) to hold the seat belt away from your body.
For maximum safety, keep the back of your seat
upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat
belt fits closely across your chest and hips. Always
fasten the seat belts on both the front and the rear seats.
Travelling without seat belts will increase the risk of severe
injury and even death in the event of an accident.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
136
fig. 96
A0K0011m
fig. 97
A0K0012m
Each seat belt should be used by only one person at a time: never travel with a child sitting on the passenger’s lap with a single
belt to protect them both fig. 98. Do not fasten other objects to
the body.
Never disassemble or tamper with the seat belt
or pretensioner components. All operations must
be performed by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
If the belt has been subjected to heavy strain, for
example after an accident, it must changed completely together with the anchors, anchor fastening screws and the pretensioner. Even if the belt has no
visible defects, it could have lost its resilience.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
❍ Always use the seat belts with the belt taut and never twisted; make sure that it is free to run smoothly;
❍ replace the belt after a serious accident, even if it does not
appear damaged. Always replace the belt if the pretensioners
were deployed.
❍ To clean the seat belts, hand wash with water and neutral soap,
rinse and leave to dry in the shade. Do not use strong detergents, bleach, paints or any other chemicals which could damage the belt fibres.
❍ prevent the reels from getting wet: their correct operation is
guaranteed only if water does not get inside;
❍ replace the seat belt when it shows significant wear or cuts.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 98
A0K0013m
137
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
138
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY
For optimum protection in the event of a crash, all passengers must
be seated and wearing adequate restraint systems. This is even
more important for children. This prescription is compulsory in all
EC countries according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. Compared
with an adult, a child’s head is larger and heavier in proportion to
his/her body and the child’s muscular and bone structures are
not fully developed. For this reason, they require restraint systems
which are different from those used by adults to protect them in
the event of an accident.
The result of research in relation to the best protection for children is illustrated in European Regulation ECE-R44, which divides
child seats into five groups in addition to making their use compulsory:
Group 0
up to 10 kg
Group 0+ up to 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 3
22-36 kg
All restraint devices must bear the type-approval data along with
the control mark on a label firmly secured to the child seat which
must never be removed. When over 1.50 m in height, from the
point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults
and have to wear the standard seat belts.
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes child seats for each weight group.
These devices are recommended, having been specifically designed
for Alfa Romeo cars.
Do not arrange child seats facing backwards if the
front air bag on the passenger’s side is enabled.
Deployment of the air bag in an accident could
cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity
of the collision. It is advisable to carry children in dedicated child seats on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of an accident.
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child
on the front seat in a cradle seat facing backwards,
the passenger’s front air bag and side bag should
be deactivated by using the Set-Up Menu. Deactivation can be verified by checking the “ warning light in the instrument panel. Also, the passenger seat
should be adjusted as far back as possible to avoid contact between the child seat and the dashboard.
FITTING “UNIVERSAL” CHILD SEAT
(with seat belts)
GROUP 1 fig. 100
From 9 to 18 kg of weight, children may be carried facing forward.
GROUP 0 and 0+ fig. 99
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards on a cradle
seat, which, by supporting the head, does not induce stress on
the neck in the event of sharp deceleration. The cradle is restrained
by the car seat belts, as shown in the diagram, and in turn it must
restrain the child with its own belts.
The diagrams are indicative and provided for assembly purposes only. Fit the child seat according to
the instructions that must be supplied with the seat.
There are seats with Isofix hooks which enable secure fastening to the seat without using the car’s
seat belts.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 99
A0K0014m
fig. 100
A0K0129m
139
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
GROUP 2 fig. 101
GROUP 3 fig. 102
Children from 15 to 25 kg can be secured using the car seat belts
directly. The child seat is needed only to position the child correctly
with respect to the belts so that the diagonal section crosses the
child’s chest and never the neck, and the lower part is snug on
the hips not the abdomen.
For children between 22 kg and 36 kg, there are boosters allowing the seat belt to fit correctly.
SAFETY
Fig. 102 shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat.
The diagrams are indicative and provided for assembly purposes only. For assembly, refer to the
instructions supplied with the child seat.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
140
fig. 101
A0K0016m
fig. 102
A0K0017m
SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR CHILD SEAT USE
The car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for child seats on the various seats of the car as shown in the following table:
Weight range
Front
passenger
Rear side and middle
passenger
up to 13 kg
U (*)
U
Group 1
9-18 kg
U (*)
U
Group 2
15-25 kg
U (*)
U
Group 3
22-36 kg
U (*)
U
Group
Group 0, 0+
Key:
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
U = suitable for restraint systems in the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”.
(*) With seat adjustable in height, position the backrest upright.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
141
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
142
Main safety rules to be followed
when carrying children:
❍ install the child seats on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of an accident.
❍ when the passenger front air bag is deactivated always check
that the F warning light remains permanently lit to confirm
the deactivation;
❍ carefully follow the instructions supplied with the child seat,
which are mandatory by law. Keep the instructions in the car
along with the other papers and this handbook. Do not use
child seats without instructions;
❍ always check the seat belt is well fastened by pulling the belt;
❍ only one child is to be strapped to each retaining system;
❍ always check the seat belts do not rest around the child’s neck;
❍ while travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly or release the
belts;
❍ Never carry children on your lap, even newborns. No-one could
hold on to a child in the event of an accident;
❍ In the event of an accident, replace the child seat with a new
one.
“ISOFIX” CHILD SEAT ASSEMBLY
SETUP
Isofix systems can be fitted alongside a traditional child seat. An
example of an Universal Isofix child seat for weight group 1 is
shown in fig. 103.
The car is provisioned for a Universal Isofix child seat, a new European standardised system for carrying children safely.
The other weight groups are covered by the specific Isofix child seat,
which can be used only if specifically designed, tested and approved
for this car (see car list provided with the child seat).
WARNING The centre rear seat is not certified for any type of child’s
seat.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 103
A0K0018m
143
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
INSTALLING A UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD SEAT
Couple the child seat to the specific lower metallic rings B-fig. 104
positioned inside the rear seat backrest (lift the hinge A upwards
to access the rings) and then fix the upper belt (provided with
the seat) to the upper couplings C-fig. 105 located on the back
of the backrest.
Systems can be fitted along side a traditional child seat “Universal Isofix”. Remember that when using a Universal Isofix child seat,
you can only use approved seats with the marking ECE R44/03
“Universal Isofix”.
The Universal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat and the special “G 0/1 S”
seat are available from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo. For any further
installation/details on usage, refer to the “Instruction Manual” supplied with the child seat.
Fit the child seat when the car is stationary. The
child seat is correctly anchored to the brackets
when you hear the click. Follow the instructions for
assembly, disassembly and positioning that the child seat
manufacturer must supply.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
144
fig. 104
A0K0109m
fig. 105
A0K0108m
PASSENGER SEAT SUITABILITY FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEATS
The table below, in compliance with European Directive ECE 16, shows the different installation possibilities of Isofix seats on seats fitted with Isofix fasteners.
Weight group
Cradle
Group 0 up to 10 kg
Group 0+ up to 13 kg
Group I from 9 to 18 kg
Seat
orientation
Isofix
size class
Rear passenger seat
Facing backwards
F
X
Facing backwards
G
X
Facing backwards
E
IL (*)
Facing backwards
E
IL (*)
Facing backwards
D
IL (*)
Facing backwards
C
IL (*)
Facing backwards
D
IL (*)
Facing backwards
C
IL (*)
Facing forwards
B
IUF
Facing forwards
BI
IUF
Facing forwards
A
IUF
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IUF: suitable for forward-facing Isofix child seats, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), type-approved for use in this weight group.
X: Isofix position not suitable for Isofix retaining system in this weight group and/or size.
IL (*): the Isofix child seat can be installed by adjusting the front seat.
CONTENTS
145
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT AIRBAGS
The car is provided with multistage front air bags (“Smart bag”)
for driver and passenger.
“SMART BAG” SYSTEM
(MULTISTAGE FRONT AIR BAGS)
The front driver/passenger air bags are designed to protect occupants in the event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity,
by placing the bag between the occupant and the steering wheel
or dashboard.
Front air bags are designed to protect car’s occupants in front crashes and therefore non-activation in other types of collisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.
The air bag do not replace, but rather complement the use of seat
belts, which should always be worn. In the event of an impact,
someone not wearing a seat belt could move forward and come
into contact with a bag which is still in the opening phase. The protection offered by the bag is reduced in such a case.
Front air bags may not be activated in the following situations:
❍ front collisions against highly deformable objects not affecting the front surface of the car (e.g. bumper collision against
guard rail, etc.);
❍ car penetration under other vehicles or protective barriers (e.g.
trucks or guard rails);
in these instances they could not provide any additional protection compared with seat belts, so their deployment would not be
useful. In these cases, non-deployment of the airbag does not
necessarily indicate a system malfunction.
Do not apply stickers or other objects to the steering wheel, passenger side air bag cover or upper
side upholstery. Do not place objects on the passenger side dashboard because these could interfere with
the correct opening of the air bag and cause severe injury
to occupants.
FRONT AIR BAG ON DRIVER’S SIDE fig. 106
This is located in a dedicated compartment in the centre of the steering wheel.
Always drive with your hands on the steering wheel
rim so that the air bag can inflate freely if needed. Do not drive with your body bent forward.
Keep your back straight against the backrest.
CONTENTS
146
fig. 106
A0K0080m
FRONT AIRBAG ON PASSENGER’S SIDE
fig. 107
Deactivating the passenger front air bag and
side bag
This is located in a dedicated compartment in the dashboard.
Deactivate the passenger front air bag and chest protection side
bags when carrying a chid on the front seat. With the air bags deactivated, the “ warning light is lit in the instrument panel.
Do not arrange cradle child seats facing backwards
if the front air bag on the passenger’s side is enabled. Deployment of the air bag in an accident
could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of
the severity of the collision. Always deactivate the
passenger’s air bag when placing a child seat on the front
seat. Also, the passenger seat should be as far back as
possible to avoid contact between the child seat and the
dashboard. Although this is not mandatory by law, the air
bag should be immediately reactivated when children are
no longer carried to ensure better protection for adults.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
To deactivate the air bags see “Knowing your
car” chapter, “Menu Items” paragraph.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 107
A0K0135m
147
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
SIDE AIR BAGS
(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)
FRONT SIDE BAGS fig. 108
The car is fitted with front side bags for driver and passenger for
protecting the chest, and window bags for protecting front and rear
passengers’ heads.
Side bags protect car occupants from side crashes of medium-high
severity, by placing the cushion between the occupant and the internal parts of the side structure of the car.
Non-activation of side bags in other types of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunction.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
These are comprised of two types of bags located in the front
back/rests, which protect the chest and pelvis area of passengers in the event of a side impact of medium-high severity.
HEAD PROTECTION SIDE AIR BAGS
(WINDOW BAGS) fig. 109
It is formed by two "curtain" window bags are located behind the
side roof upholstery and are covered by special trimming.
They were designed to protect the head of front and rear passengers in case of side collisions, thanks to the wide cushion inflation
surface.
The air bags are not deployed in the event of impact of low severity (for which the retaining action of the seat belts is sufficient).
It is therefore always necessary to wear seat belts.
In the event of a side impact, the system provides best protection
if the passenger sits on the seat in a correct position, thus allowing correct window bag deployment.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
148
fig. 108
A0K0081m
fig. 109
A0K0035m
Do not hook rigid objects to the clothes hangers or
support handles.
Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door,
windows or on the window bag area to avoid injuries during inflation.
Never lean your head, arms or elbows out of the
window.
WARNINGS
Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised steam (wash by
hand or at automatic seat washing stations).
The front and/or side air bags may activate in the event of sharp
impacts to the underbody of the car (e.g. impact with steps, pavements, potholes or road bumps etc.).
A small amount of dust will be released when the airbags are deployed. This is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Dust may
irritate your skin and eyes: in this case, wash with mild soap and
water.
All operations on air bags (inspections, repairs and replacement)
must be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be scrapped, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the air bags deactivated.
Pretensioners and airbags are deployed according to different logics on the basis of the type of collision. Failure to deploy of one
or more of these devices does not therefore indicate a system fault.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
149
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
If the warning light ¬ does not turn on when the key
is turned to MAR, or if it stays on when travelling (together with the message on the display on some versions), there could be a failure in the restraint systems. If
this is the case, the air bags or pretensioners may not be deployed in the event of an accident or, less likely, they may
be deployed accidentally. Do not drive the car and contact
a Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider to have the system checked immediately.
With the ignition key inserted and turned to MAR,
the air bags can be deployed also with the car at
a standstill, if it is hit by another vehicle even if the
engine is off. For this reason, children must never sit on
the front seat, even if the car is not moving. Remember
that no safety device (airbag or pretensioner) will be deployed in a crash if the key is inserted and turned to the
STOP position. Failure to deploy in such cases must not
be considered a sign of malfunction.
The expiry dates of the pyrotechnic charge and
clock contact are shown in the plate installed inside the glove compartment. Go to an Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service Provider when the time to have them
replaced approaches.
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the “
warning light turns on (front airbag on passenger’s
side enabled) and will blinks for a few seconds as
a reminder that the passenger airbag will be deployed
in the event of a crash and then go off.
Do not travel with objects on your lap, in front of
your chest, or between your lips (e.g. pipes, pencils, etc.): you may be seriously injured in the event
of a crash with air bag deployment.
The front air bags are deployed in the event of
more severe collisions than those required for deploying the pretensioners.
For collisions in the range between the two thresholds, it
is normal for only the pretensioners to be activated.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
150
If someone tries to steal or damage your car, and
in the event of floods, have the air bag system
checked by an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service
Provider.
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR PETROL VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
❍ engage the handbrake and place the gearbox in neutral;
❍ press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the
accelerator;
❍ turn the ignition key to AVV and let it go the moment the engine starts.
IMPORTANT
❍ If the engine does not start on the first attempt, turn the ignition key to STOP before repeating the operation.
❍ If, when the ignition key is at MAR, the instrument panel warning light Y remains on together with warning light U, turn
the key to STOP and then back to MAR; if the warning light
remains on, try with the other keys provided with the car. If
you are still unable to start the engine contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
❍ Never leave the ignition key on MAR when the engine is off.
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIESEL VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
❍ engage the handbrake and place the gearbox in neutral;
❍ turn the ignition key to the MAR position: warning lights m
and Y on the instrument panel will light up;
❍ wait for the warning lights to go out;
❍ press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the
accelerator;
❍ turn the ignition key to AVV as soon as warning light m goes
out. Waiting too long will waste the heating work carried out
by the glow plugs. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
If warning light m blinks for approximately 1
minute after starting or during prolonged cranking, this indicates a fault in the glow plug pre-heating system. Use the car normally if the engine starts and
go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
It is dangerous to have the engine running indoors.
The engine takes in oxygen and discharges carbon
dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gases.
CONTENTS
151
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
It is advisable not to demand maximum performance from your car (e.g. excessive acceleration,
long distances at top rpm, excessively intense braking, etc.) when it is first used.
SAFETY
When the engine is switched off never leave the
key in the MAR position to prevent useless current absorption from draining the battery.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
152
HOW TO WARM UP THE ENGINE
AFTER IT HAS JUST STARTED
Proceed as follows:
❍ drive off slowly, letting the engine turn at medium speed. Do
not accelerate abruptly;
❍ do not demand maximum performance for the first few kilometres. Wait until the engine coolant temperature indicator
starts moving.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Turn the ignition key to STOP while the engine is idling.
Remember that the brake servo and electromechanical power steering are not operational until the engine has been started, therefore much
more effort than usual is required on the brake pedal and
steering wheel.
Never jump start the engine by pushing, towing or
driving downhill. These manoeuvres may damage
the catalytic converter.
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, before turning the engine off you
should allow it to idle to allow the temperature in the engine compartment to fall.
A quick burst on the accelerator before turning off
the engine serves absolutely no practical purpose;
it wastes fuel and is especially damaging to turbocharged engines.
PARKING THE CAR
IMPORTANT Carry out these manoeuvres with the brake pedal pressed.
Switch off the engine and pull up the handbrake. Engage a gear
(1st if the car is facing uphill or reverse if it is facing downhill) and
leave the wheels steered to one side.
If the car is parked on a steep slope block the wheels with a wedge
or stone. Always remove the ignition key when leaving the car.
IMPORTANT For cars equipped with a front armrest, lift this up to
ensure that it does not interfere with the action of the handbrake.
HANDBRAKE fig. 110
To engage the handbrake pull lever A upwards until the car is secured. To disengage slightly raise lever A, press and hold down button B and lower the lever.
The car should be locked after a few notches: if this
is not so, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to
have the handbrake adjusted.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 110
A0K0073m
153
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
USING THE GEARBOX
To engage the gears, press the clutch pedal down fully and shift
the gear lever into the required position (a diagram is shown
on the knob fig. 111).
To engage 6th gear, operate the lever by pressing it towards the
right in order to avoid engaging 4th gear by mistake. Similar action to pass from sixth to fifth gear.
To engage reverse gear (R) from the neutral position, lift up ring
A-fig. 111 and simultaneously move the lever to the left and then
forwards.
IMPORTANT Reverse may be engaged only when the car is at a
standstill.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
154
fig. 111
A0K0082m
Press the clutch pedal fully to change gears correctly. Therefore, the floor area under the pedals
must be clear: ensure that any rubber mats are flat
and do not interfere with the pedals.
time.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
lever, because this pressure, even if light, can wear
out the inner components of the gearbox over
SAVING FUEL
Roof rack/ski rack
Here are some suggestions which may help you to save fuel and
lower the amount of harmful emissions released into the atmosphere.
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof after use. These
accessories decrease aerodynamic penetration and have a negative effect on fuel consumption. It is better to use a trailer to transport particularly bulky objects.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Electric devices
SAFETY
Car maintenance
Have checks and adjustments carried out in accordance with the
“Scheduled Servicing Plan” (see chapter “Servicing and maintenance”).
Use electric devices only for the amount of time needed. The heated rear windscreen, additional headlights, windscreen wipers and
heater fan require a considerable amount of energy; increasing the
current uptake increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% in an
urban cycle).
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Tyres
Climate control system
Check the tyre pressure at least once every 4 weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling
is higher.
Using the climate control system will increase consumption: use
the air vents when the external temperature so allows.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with an overloaded boot. The weight of the car and
its arrangement greatly affect fuel consumption and stability.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Spoilers
The use of non-certified spoilers may adversely affect aerodynamics and fuel consumption.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
155
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
DRIVING STYLE
CONDITIONS OF USE
Starting
Cold starting
Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs when the car is
stationary; this causes the engine to warm up more slowly, thereby increasing fuel consumption and emissions. It is advisable to set
off immediately and slowly, avoiding high revs: this allows the
engine to warm up more quickly.
Short distances and frequent cold start-ups prevent the engine from
reaching its optimum running temperature. Consequently, both consumption (from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle) and emissions
will increase.
Unnecessary actions
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Avoid revving up when starting at traffic lights or before stopping
the engine. The latter action, like double-declutching, is unnecessary and causes increased fuel consumption and pollution.
High fuel consumption is caused by heavy traffic, for instance when
travelling in a queue with frequent use of low gears or in cities with
many traffic lights. Mountain roads and uneven surfaces also have
a negative effect on consumption.
Gear selection
Traffic hold-ups
Use a high gear when traffic and road conditions allow. Using a
low gear for faster acceleration will increase fuel consumption. In
the same way, improper use of a high gear increases fuel consumption, emissions and engine wear.
During prolonged hold-ups (level crossings) the engine should be
switched off.
Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases as speed increases. Keep
your speed as even as possible, avoiding unnecessary braking
and acceleration which cause excessive fuel consumption and increased emissions.
Acceleration
CONTENTS
156
Traffic and road conditions
Accelerating violently severely affects consumption and emissions:
acceleration should be gradual and should not exceed the maximum torque.
TOWING TRAILERS
IMPORTANT
The car must be provided with a type-approved tow hook and adequate electric system to tow caravans or trailers. Installation must
be carried out by a specialist.
Install any specific and/or additional rear-view mirrors in accordance with the highway code of the country in which you are travelling.
Remember that when towing a trailer, steep hills are harder to climb,
braking distances increase and overtaking takes longer depending
on the overall weight.
Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly
using the brake.
The weight of the trailer reduces the load capacity of the car by the
same amount. Consider the weight at full load, including accessories and luggage, to make sure you do not exceed the maximum
towable weight (shown in the registration document).
Respect the speed limits specific to each country for vehicles towing trailers. In any event do not exceed 100 km/h.
INSTALLING A TOW HOOK
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to install a tow hook.
The ABS with which the car is equipped will not control the braking system of the trailer. Take extra
care when travelling on slippery roads.
Never modify the braking system of the car to control the trailer brake. The trailer braking system
must be fully independent from the hydraulic system of the car.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
157
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
158
SNOW TYRES
Use snow tyres of the same size as the normal tyres provided
with the car. Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will advise you on the
most appropriate tyre for use.
Only use these tyres in the event of ice or snow on the roads.
For the type, pressures and specifications of the snow tyre to be
used, follow carefully the instructions given in the “Wheels” paragraph of the “Technical specifications” chapter.
The performance of these tyres is considerably reduced when the
tread depth is less than 4 mm. If this is the case, replace them.
Due to their specific features, the performance of snow tyres is
much lower than that of standard tyres in normal conditions or on
long motorway stretches. You should therefore use them only in
the conditions for which they were designed.
All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater
safety when driving, during braking and better driveability. Remember that it is inappropriate to change the direction of rotation
of tyres.
The maximum speed for snow tyres marked “Q”
is 160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T” tyres
and 210 km/h for “H” tyres. You should, however, always stick to the speed limits of the highway code.
SNOW CHAINS
STORING THE CAR
The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations. Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheel tyres
(drive wheels).
Check the tension of the chains after the first few metres have been
driven.
Use reduced bulk snow chains:
If the car is to be left inactive for longer than a month, the following
precautions should be noted:
❍ park the car in a dry, covered and, if possible, ventilated area;
engage a gear and check that the handbrake is not engaged;
❍ disconnect the negative battery terminal and check battery
charge. Repeat this check once every three months during storage;
❍ clean and protect painted areas using protective wax;
❍ clean and protect the shiny metal areas using special commercially-available products;
❍ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber windscreen and rear window wiper blades and lift them off the glass;
❍ slightly open the windows;
❍ cover the car with a fabric or perforated plastic sheet. Do not
use compact plastic sheets which do not allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the car.
❍ inflate tyres to a pressure of +0.5 bar above the normal specified pressure and check the pressure at regular intervals;
❍ if you have not disconnected the battery, check the battery
charge every thirty days;
❍ do not drain the engine cooling system.
– All versions: for 195/55 R16”, 205/55 R16” and 225/45
R17” size tyres use low-clearance snow chains with a maximum
protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
IMPORTANT The space-saver wheel cannot be fitted with snow
chains. If a front (drive) wheel is punctured and snow chains must
be used, you must remove a normal wheel from the rear and replace this one with the space-saver wheel. In this way, with two
normal drive wheels, it is possible to use snow chains.
Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted - do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps
and pavements and also avoid driving for long distances on roads not covered with snow to avoid damaging the car and the road surface.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
159
blank page
IN AN EMERGENCY
In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet.
You can also consult www.alfaromeo.com to find your nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
STARTING THE ENGINE
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
If the Y warning light in the instrument panel remains on constantly, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
JUMP STARTING
If the battery is flat, the engine may be started using an auxiliary
battery with the same capacity or a little higher than the flat one.
For engine starting follow the procedure below, fig. 112:
❍ connect the positive terminal (+) of the booster battery only
with the point indicated on the vehicle battery (writing OK
figure 112) and nowhere else;
❍ with a second lead, connect the negative terminal (–) of the
auxiliary battery to an earthing point E on the engine or the
gearbox of the car to be started;
❍ when the engine has been started, follow the sequence above
in reverse order to remove the leads.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider if you cannot
start the engine after several attempts.
IMPORTANT Never connect the negative terminals of the two batteries directly! If the auxiliary battery is installed on another car,
prevent accidental contact between metallic parts of the two cars.
CONTENTS
fig. 112
A0K0247m
161
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Never use a fast battery-charger to start the engine as this could damage the electronic systems
of your car, particularly the ignition and fuel supply control units.
BUMP STARTING
CHANGING A TYRE
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The car is equipped with an “Automatic Fix&Go Kit“: see “Automatic Fix&Go Kit” for how to use this device.
Alternatively to the “Automatic Fix&Go Kit” the car may be
equipped with a space-saver spare wheel: see the instructions on
the following pages for changing the tyre.
Never start the engine by pushing, towing or driving downhill.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
162
The space-saver spare wheel is vehicle-specific:
do not use it on vehicles of other model and do not
use space-saver spare wheels from other models
on your car. The space-saver spare wheel must only be
used in an emergency. Never use it longer than strictly
necessary and never exceed 80 km/h. On the space-saver
spare wheel there is a label, summarizing the main warnings about the space-saver spare wheel usage restrictions.
Never remove or cover the label. Never apply any hub
cap to the space-saver spare wheel.
Use your hazard lights, warning triangle, etc. to
show that your car is stationary in compliance with
regulations. Passengers should get out of the car,
particularly if it is heavily loaded, and wait for the wheel
to be changed away from the traffic. In the event of a
wheel change on a slope or on unsurfaced roads, chock
the wheels.
Vehicle handling is modified with the space-saver
spare wheel fitted. Avoid violent acceleration and
braking, sharp steering and fast cornering. The
overall duration of the space-saver spare wheel is of about
3000 km, after which the relevant tyre must be replaced
with another one of the same type. Never install a traditional tyre on a rim designed to be used as a space-saver
spare wheel. Repair and refit the standard wheel as soon
as possible. Using two or more space-saver spare wheels
at the same time is forbidden. Do not apply grease to
the bolt threads before assembly: they might spontaneously unscrew.
The jack may be used to replace wheels only on
the car that it comes with or other cars of the same
model. Never use the jack for other purposes, such
as lifting other models. Never use the jack to carry out repairs under the car. Incorrect positioning of the jack may
cause the car to fall. Do not use the jack for loads higher
than the one shown on its label. Never install snow chains
on the space-saver spare wheel; if a front tyre (driving
wheel) is punctured and you need to use snow chains, use
a standard wheel from the rear axle and install the spacesaver spare wheel on the rear axle. In this way, with two
normal drive wheels, it is possible to use snow chains.
If the hub cap is not fitted correctly, it may come
off when the car is travelling. Never tamper with
the inflation valve. Never introduce tools of any
kind between the rim and the tyre. Regularly check the
inflation pressure of the tyres and space-saver wheel (see
chapter “Technical specifications”).
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
JACK
Important notes:
❍ the jack weight is 1.76 kg;
❍ the jack requires no adjustment;
❍ the jack cannot be repaired; if it breaks it must be replaced with
a new jack;
❍ no tool other than the cranking device may be fitted on the
jack.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
163
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Replace the wheel as follows:
❍ stop the car in a position so that it is not a danger for on-coming traffic and where you can replace the wheel safely. The
ground must be flat and solid;
❍ switch off the engine, pull up the handbrake and engage 1st
gear or reverse; put on the high visibility jacket (required by
law) before leaving the car;
❍ open the boot, pull tab A-fig. 113 and lift up the mat;
❍ using the wrench A - fig. 114 positioned in the tool box, loosen
the locking device, take the tool box B and place it close to the
wheel to be replaced, then take the space/saver wheel C;
❍ take tool A-fig. 115 and loosen the fastening bolts by approximately one turn. For versions with alloy rims, shake the
car to facilitate detachment of the rim from the wheel hub.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 114
A0K0124m
fig. 115
A0K0038m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
164
fig. 113
A0K0168m
❍ position the jack under the car, near the wheel to be changed.
On versions where this is fitted, be careful not to damage the
plastic aerodynamic guard;
❍ operate the device A-fig. 116 so as to extend the jack, until the
upper part B-fig. 117 is inserted correctly inside the device C;
❍ warn anybody nearby that the car is about to be lifted. They
must stay clear and not touch the car until it is back on the
ground;
❍ fit the handle D-fig. 116 in the seat in device A, operate the
jack and lift the car until the wheel to be changed is several
centimetres off the ground;
❍ for versions with wheel cap, remove the wheel cap after loosening the 4 fastening bolts and finally loosen the fifth bolt and
extract the wheel;
❍ make sure the contact surfaces between space-saver spare
wheel and hub are clean so that the fastening bolts will not
come loose;
❍ fit the space-saver spare wheel by inserting the first bolt for two
threads into the hole closest to the valve;
❍ use wrench A-fig. 115 to fully tighten the retaining bolts;
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Visit Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible to check the correct tightening of the main
wheel bolts.
❍ operate jack handle D-fig. 116 to lower the car. Then extract
the jack;
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 116
A0K0039m
fig. 117
A0K0083m
165
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
❍ use the wrench A-fig. 115 provided to fasten the bolts completely in a criss-cross fashion as per the order illustrated in
fig. 118;
❍ when replacing an alloy wheel it is advisable to place it upside
down, with the aesthetic part facing upwards.
Restore the standard wheel as soon as possible, because, once placed
in the associated compartment, the luggage compartment load platform is rendered uneven as the standard wheel is larger than the
spare wheel.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
REMOVING THE SUBWOOFER
(versions with Bose HI-FI)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
IMPORTANT The following procedure only applies to cars equipped
with Bose HI-FI systems with subwoofer (for versions/markets,
where provided).
Subwoofer and space-saver spare wheel
On these versions, the tools needed for changing the wheel are
arranged in a specific container on the left-hand side of the boot
(see fig. 119). The jack is located in a pocket, again on the lefthand side of the boot (see fig. 119a).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
166
fig. 118
A0K0040m
fig. 119
A0K0235m
Proceed as follows to remove the subwoofer:
❍ open the boot, pull the tab A-fig. 113, lift the mat upwards and
remove the load compartment spacer fig. 119;
❍ loosen the fastening device A-fig. 120, remove the clip B fastening the cable and then lift the subwoofer;
❍ rest the subwoofer on the side of the boot and take the spacesaver spare wheel;
❍ then replace the wheel as described above.
When you have finished:
❍ reposition the subwoofer correctly (see indications on the label
applied over the subwoofer itself), so that the word “BOSE”
is positioned in the right direction for reading;
❍ reposition the subwoofer wire correctly to avoid pinching it. Then
fasten the clip B-fig. 120 and fasten the blocking device. Finally,
position the load compartment spacer fig. 119 correctly and
lower the boot mat.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 119a
A0K0228m
fig. 120
A0K0236m
167
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Subwoofer and “Automatic Fix&Go Kit”
REFITTING THE WHEEL
Locating the Automatic Fix&Go Kit:
❍ open the boot, pull tab A-fig. 113 and lift up the mat;
❍ take the “Automatic Fix&Go Kit” located on the left side of the
boot (fig. 121);
❍ inflate the wheel (see “Automatic Fix&Go Kit”).
IMPORTANT If you need to remove the subwoofer follow the indications shown on the adhesive label fig. 121 over the subwoofer
itself to reposition it correctly.
Following the procedure previously described, raise the car and
remove the space-saver spare wheel.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
When you have finished:
❍ stow the space-saver spare wheel in the compartment provided in the boot;
❍ insert the jack and the other tools in the container;
❍ arrange the container and tools on the space-saver spare wheel;
❍ reposition the boot mat correctly.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
168
Proceed as follows:
❍ make sure the contact surfaces between standard wheel and
hub are clean so that the fastening bolts will not come loose;
❍ for versions with steel rims: fixed the wheel hub onto the rim;
❍ fit the hub cap by aligning the crescent hole with the bolt you
have fitted, then insert the other 4 bolts;
❍ tighten the retaining bolts using wrench A-fig. 115;
❍ lower the car and remove the jack;
❍ use wrench A-fig. 115 to fully tighten the bolts, following the
sequence shown in fig. 118;
fig. 121
A0K0178m
“Automatic Fix&Go” KIT
This is located in the boot (the kit container may change according
to versions - see fig. 122). The kit container also contains a screwdriver and the tow ring. The kit contains:
❍ a bottle A-fig. 122a containing sealing liquid, provided with:
filling tube B and adhesive label C with the wording
“max. 80 km/h” to be placed in a clearly visible position
(e.g. on the dashboard) after repairing the tyre;
❍ a compressor D complete with pressure gauge and connectors;
❍ an information booklet fig. 123, providing instructions for using the kit correctly. This booklet should be given to the persons charged with handling the tyre treated with this kit;
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 122a
A0K0019m
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 122
A0K0126m
fig. 123
A0K0020m
169
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
❍ a pair of gloves located in the side compartment of the compressor;
❍ adapters for inflating different elements.
IMPORTANT The sealing liquid is suitable for use at temperatures
in the range from –20°C to +50°C. The sealant has an expiry
date.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Hand over the instruction booklet to the personnel
charged with treating the tyre repaired with the
Automatic Fix&Go kit.
In the event of a puncture caused by foreign bodies, the kit may be used to repair tyres showing
damage to the tread or shoulder up to a maximum
diameter of 4 mm.
It is not possible to repair damage to the tyre sidewall. Do not use the kit on tyres damaged by running with a flat tyre.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
170
If the wheel rim is damaged (the channel is so deformed as to cause air leakage) it cannot be repaired. Do not remove the foreign body (screw
or nail) from the tyre.
Do not operate the compressor for longer than 20
minutes consecutively. Risk of overheating. The kit
is not suitable for permanent repairs. The tyres repaired may only be used temporarily.
Dispose of the bottle and sealing liquid it contains
properly. Dispose according to the national and local
laws in force.
The bottle contains ethylene and latex: it may
cause an allergic reaction. Harmful if swallowed.
Irritating for eyes. There could be a reaction in the
event of inhalation or contact. Avoid contact with the eyes,
skin and clothes. In the event of contact, wash immediately with plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting if swallowed. Rinse your mouth and drink plenty of water. Call
a doctor immediately. Keep away from children. The product must not be used by asthmatics. Do not breathe in
the vapours during insertion and suction. Call a doctor immediately if allergic reactions are noted. Store the bottle
in the specific compartment, away from sources of heat.
The sealant has an expiry date. Replace the cylinder if
its sealant is out of date.
❍ make sure that switch A-fig. 126 for the compressor is in position 0 (off), start the engine, insert the plug into the luggage
compartment current socket (see fig. 126a) or cigar lighter on
central tunnel (see fig. 127) and switch on the compressor
by bringing switch A-fig. 126 to position I (on);
INFLATION PROCEDURE
Wear the gloves included in the kit.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Proceed as follows:
❍ apply the handbrake, loosen the cap from the tyre inflation
valve, extract the flexible tube A-fig. 125 and screw ring nut
B onto the tyre inflation valve;
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 126
A0K0021m
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 125
A0K0127m
fig. 126a
A0K0152m
171
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❍ inflate the tyre to the pressure shown in the “Wheels” paragraph in the “Technical Specifications” chapter. In order to obtain a precise reading, check the pressure on pressure gauge
B-fig. 126 with the compressor off;
❍ if after 5 minutes you cannot reach at least 1.8 bar, unplug the
compressor from the valve and the socket, then move the car
forward about ten metres in order to distribute the sealant inside the tyre evenly, then repeat the inflation operation;
Apply the adhesive label where it can be easily
seen by the driver as a reminder that the tyre has
been treated with the quick repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do
not accelerate or brake suddenly.
If the pressure has fallen below 1.8 bar, do not drive any further: the Automatic Fix&Go quick tyre
repair kit cannot guarantee proper hold because
the tyre is too damaged. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
❍ if a pressure value of at least 1.8 bar is detected, restore the
correct pressure (with the engine running and the handbrake
engaged), and drive with care to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Remember to inform the workshop that the tyre
has been treated with a quick repair kit. Give the
instruction booklet to the personnel charged with
handling the treated tyre.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
172
❍ if you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least 1.8 bar within
5 minutes from the compressor switching on, do not drive off
and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services;
❍ after driving for about 10 minutes, stop and check the tyre pressure again; remember to put the handbrake on;
fig. 127
A0K0128m
CHECKING AND RESTORING TYRE PRESSURE
REPLACING THE BOTTLE
The compressor can also be used to check and if necessary top
up the tyre pressure. Release quick coupling A-fig. 128 and connect it directly to the tyre to be inflated.
Proceed as follows:
❍ release coupling A-fig. 129 and disconnect pipe B;
❍ turn the bottle to be replaced anticlockwise and raise it;
❍ fit the new bottle and turn it clockwise;
❍ insert coupling A or connect tube B into its housing.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
A
fig. 128
A0K0086m
fig. 129
A0K0041m
173
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
174
CHANGING A BULB
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
❍ Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation;
❍ blown bulbs must be replaced with others of the same type
and power:
❍ after replacing a headlight bulb, always check its alignment;
❍ when a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse
is intact before changing the bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to the “Changing a fuse” paragraph in this section.
Halogen bulbs must be handled holding the metallic part only. Touching the transparent part of the
bulb with your fingers may reduce the intensity
of the light emitted and even compromise the longevity
of the bulb itself. In the event of accidental contact, wipe
the bulb with an alcohol-soaked cloth and leave to dry.
Modifications or repairs to the electrical system
(electronic control units) that are not carried out
properly or do not take the technical specifications
of the system into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas which may
cause small fragments of glass to be projected outwards if the bulb is broken.
Due to the high power supply voltage, gas discharge bulbs (Bi-Xenon) should only be replaced
by specialised personnel: danger of death! Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
IMPORTANT When the weather is cold or damp or after heavy rain
or after washing, the surface of headlights or rear lights, may steam
up and/or form drops of condensation on the inside. This is a natural phenomenon due to the difference in temperature and humidity
between the inside and the outside of the glass which does not
indicate a fault and does not compromise the normal operation of
lighting devices. The mist disappears quickly turning the lights on,
starting from the centre of the diffuser, extending progressively
towards the edges.
BULB TYPES fig. 130
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
The car has the following light bulbs:
A. Glass bulbs: pressed into position. Pull to extract.
B. Bayonet-type bulbs: to remove from its holder, press the bulb
and turn it anti-clockwise, then extract it.
C. Tubular bulbs: release them from their contacts to remove.
D. Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb, release the clip holding the
bulb in place.
E. Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb, release the clip holding the
bulb in place.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 130
A0K0022m
175
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Bulbs
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
176
Ref. figure 130
LED
–
–
Rear side lights
LED
–
–
Dipped beams
H7
55W
D
Main beams
H1
55W
E
F
D1S
–
Front direction indicators
PY24W
24W
B
Rear direction indicators
R10W
10W
B
Side direction indicators
LED
–
–
Brake light
LED
–
–
3rd brake light
LED
–
–
W5W
5W
A
Number plate light
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Power
Front side lights/Day lights (DRL)
Main/Dipped beams
(versions with Bi-Xenon headlights)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Type
Fog lights
H3
55W
E
Rear fog light
H21W
21W
B
Reverse light
P21W
21W
B
Front ceiling light
C10W
10W
C
Boot courtesy light
W5W
5W
A
Glove compartment courtesy light
C5W
5W
C
Puddle light
W5W
5W
A
CHANGING AN EXTERIOR BULB
FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS fig. 131
These contain the bulbs for the side lights/day lights (DRL), dipped
beams, main beams and direction indicators. The bulbs are arranged
as follows:
A. Side lights/day lights and main beam headlights;
B. Dipped beam headlights;
C. Direction indicators.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ remove cover A-fig. 131;
❍ remove the connector A-fig. 132 and then open the tabs B towards;
❍ extract the bulb C and replace it;
❍ refit the new lamp, making sure that it is locked correctly, and
secure the tabs B again and reconnect the connector A;
❍ finally refit the cover A-fig. 131.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
SIDE LIGHTS/DAY LIGHTS (DRL)
These are LEDs. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace
these lights.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 131
A0K0201m
fig. 132
A0K0202m
177
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
DIRECTION INDICATORS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ remove cover B-fig. 131;
❍ remove the connector A-fig. 133, press the tab B forward and
then release by pushing it towards the inside the car;
❍ extract the bulb C and replace it;
❍ refit the new lamp, making sure that it is locked correctly, and
secure the tab B again and reconnect the connector A;
❍ finally refit cover B-fig. 131.
Front
To replace the bulb, turn the cover C-fig. 131 anticlockwise by ¼
of a turn and replace the bulb + bulb holder assembly A-fig. 134.
Side
These are LEDs. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace
these lights.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace these bulbs.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
178
fig. 133
A0K0203m
fig. 134
A0K0204m
REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS
TAILLIGHTS/BRAKE LIGHTS
These contain the taillights, brake lights, direction indicators (bulbs
in fixed light cluster), reverse light and rear fog light (bulb in light
cluster on boot hatch).
These are LEDs. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace
these lights.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Removing the fixed light cluster
Proceed as follows:
❍ open the boot and loosen the rear light cluster fastening screw
A-fig. 135;
❍ extract the light cluster by removing it with both hands in the
direction of the arrow (see fig. 135);
❍ connect the electrical connector and replace the bulb concerned.
With the light cluster removed, to replace the bulb undo the two
screws A-fig. 136, remove the bulb holder and replace bulb B.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 135
A0K0184m
fig. 136
A0K0205m
179
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
REAR FOG LIGHTS/REVERSING LIGHTS
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❍ open the boot and remove the cover A-fig. 137 using a screwdriver in the point indicated by an arrow;
❍ remove the connector A-fig. 138 and extract the bulb holder
assembly by operating on the retaining tab B and then by loosening the screw C;
❍ remove the bulb by pushing it slightly and turning it anticlockwise fig. 138;
D: reverse light bulb
E: fog light bulb
❍ refit the bulb holder assembly positioning it correctly, fasten
screw C and then fix it by means of the retaining tab B. Then
refit the cover A-fig. 137.
IMPORTANT Protect the tip of the screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching when removing the cover A-fig. 137.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
180
fig. 137
A0K0176m
fig. 138
A0K0177m
THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
These are LEDs and are located on the spoiler integrated on the
boot hatch. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace these
lights.
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❍ remove number plate lights group A-fig. 139;
❍ turn bulb holder B-fig. 140 anticlockwise, remove bulb C and
replace it.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 139
A0K0147m
fig. 140
A0K0146m
181
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
CHANGING AN INTERIOR BULB
REAR CEILING LIGHT
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ remove courtesy light A-fig. 143 by applying leverage at the
points shown by the arrows;
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ remove courtesy light A-fig. 141 by applying leverage at the
points shown by the arrows;
❍ open flap B-fig. 142 replace bulb C, releasing it from the side
contacts. Make sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured
between the contacts;
❍ close flap B-fig. 142 and secure courtesy light A-fig. 141 in
its housing.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 142
A0K0089m
fig. 143
A0K0062m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
182
fig. 141
A0K0090m
❍ open flap B-fig. 144, replace bulb C, releasing it from the side
contacts. Make sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured between the contacts;
❍ close flap B-fig. 144 and secure courtesy light A-fig. 143 in
its housing.
❍ refit the light A-fig. 145 by inserting in its correct position on
one side and then on the other and then press the other side
until you hear it click.
BOOT LIGHT
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ open the boot and extract the light A-fig. 145 by operating in
the point shown by the arrow;
❍ open the protection B-fig. 146 and replace the bulb;
❍ close the protection B on the lens;
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 145
A0K0173m
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 144
A0K0091m
fig. 146
A0K0148m
183
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ open the glove compartment and extract the light A-fig. 147;
❍ open the protection B and replace the bulb;
❍ re-close the protective cover B on the lens;
❍ refit the light A by inserting it in its correct position firstly on
one side and then on the other until it clicks into place.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
184
fig. 147
A0K0172m
COURTESY LIGHT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
For the replacement of these bulbs, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
PUDDLE LIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❍ open the door (front or rear) and extract the light A-fig. 149;
❍ open the protection B and replace the bulb;
❍ re-close the protective cover B on the lens;
❍ refit the light by inserting it in its correct position firstly on one
side and then on the other until it clicks into place.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 149
A0K0149m
185
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
CHANGING A FUSE
Use the pliers A-fig. 151 under the engine compartment fusebox
lid to remove the fuses (see “Engine compartment fusebox” for
how to remove the lid).
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuses protect the electric system: they blow in the event of a
fault/intervention in the system. Check the state of the corresponding fuse when a device does not work: the filament A-fig.
150 must be intact.
If it is, replace the blown fuse with a new one with the same amperage (same colour).
B = intact fuse.
C = fuse with damaged filament.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
186
fig. 150
A0K0042m
fig. 151
A0K0207m
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should the
fuse blow again.
If a general protection fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDIFUSE, MAXI-FUSE) blows, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Never replace a blown fuse with metallic wires or
other material.
Remove the key from the ignition switch and switch
off all loads before replacing a fuse.
SAFETY
Never replace a fuse with another of higher amperage: FIRE RISK.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if a safety system (air bags, brakes), engine system (engine, gearbox) or steering system general protection fuse blows.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
187
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
FUSE LOCATION
Fuses are grouped together in three fuseboxes located in the engine compartment, on the dashboard and inside the boot.
Engine compartment fusebox fig. 153
This is located by the side of the battery: loosen the screws A-fig. 152 and remove the lid B to access the fuses. The number of the
electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. After replacing the fuse, make sure you close
cover B on the fusebox.
If you have to wash the engine compartment, take care not to aim the jet of water directly at the fuse box or windscreen
wiper motors.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
188
fig. 152
A0K0174m
fig. 153
A0K0231m
Fusebox on dashboard
Insert a hand in the seat A-fig. 154 and lower the flap B to access the fuses. The fuses are located in the fusebox shown in fig. 155.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 154
A0K0206m
fig. 155
A0K0232m
189
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Boot fusebox
The fuse box (fig. 157) is located on the left side of the luggage compartment underneath the side cover. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to access it.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
190
fig. 157
A0K0045m
FUSE TABLE
LIGHTS
FUSE
AMPS
FIGURE
Right main beam headlight
F91
7.5
155
Left main beam headlight
F90
7.5
155
Right dipped beam headlight
(versions with halogen headlights)
F12
7.5
155
Left dipped beam headlight
(versions with halogen headlights)
F13
7.5
155
Right dipped beam headlight
(versions with Bi-Xenon headlights)
F12
15
155
Left dipped beam headlight
(versions with Bi-Xenon headlights)
F13
15
155
Right fog light
F93
7.5
155
Left fog light
F92
7.5
155
Boot light/Sun visor lights/
Door puddle light/Glove compartment light/
Front/rear ceiling light
Radionavigator display
F32
10
155
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
191
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
192
USERS
FUSE
AMPS
FIGURE
Headlight washer pump supply
F09
30
153
Horn
F10
15
153
AC compressor
F19
7.5
153
Heated rear window
F20
30
153
Fuel pump
F21
15
153
Fuel pump (1750 Turbo Petrol version)
F21
20
153
Various devices
F31
5
155
Rear electric window (left side)
F33
20
155
Rear electric window (right side)
F34
20
155
+30
F36
10
155
Various devices
F37
7.5
155
Central locking
F38
20
155
Body Computer power supply
F42
5
155
USERS
FUSE
AMPS
FIGURE
Two-way windscreen washer pump
F43
20
155
Front electric window (driver side)
F47
20
155
Front electric window (passenger side)
F48
20
155
Various devices
F49
5
155
Various devices
F51
5
155
+30
F53
7.5
155
Lumbar adjustments
F60
15
157
Front seat heater
F61
15
157
BOSE amplifier + Subwoofer
F62
20
157
Left front seat movement
F63
15
157
Right front seat movement
F64
15
157
Electric sunroof
F65
15
157
Cigar lighter/power socket
F85
15
153
12V boot power socket
F86
15
153
IBS Battery charge status sensor for Start&Stop system
F87
5
153
External mirror defrosters
F88
7.5
153
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
193
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
194
RECHARGING THE BATTERY
VERSIONS WITHOUT Start&Stop
(for versions/markets, where provided)
IMPORTANT The battery recharging procedure is provided for information purposes only. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to carry out this operation.
Charge the battery as follows:
❍ disconnect the battery negative terminal;
❍ connect the charger leads to the battery terminals, observing
the polarity;
❍ turn on the charger;
❍ when you have finished, turn the charger off before disconnecting the battery;
❍ reconnect battery negative terminal.
We recommend recharging the battery slowly for approximately
24 hours at low amperage. A prolonged recharge might damage
the battery.
VERSIONS WITH Start&Stop fig. 158
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Charge the battery as follows:
❍ proceed as follows: detach the connector A (by pressing button B) from sensor C for monitoring the status of the battery
installed on the battery negative pole D;
❍ connect the positive cable to the positive battery terminal E and
the negative terminal to the sensor D as shown in the figure;
❍ turn on the charger. Turn the device off after recharging;
❍ after having disconnected the recharging device, reconnect the
connector A to the sensor C as shown in the figure.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 158
A0K0200m
195
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
LIFTING THE CAR
TOWING THE CAR
If you need to lift the car contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services,
who will be equipped with a workshop lift.
The tow ring provided with the car is housed in the tool box in
the boot.
IMPORTANT Be careful when positioning the lift for versions with
side spoilers.
ATTACHING THE TOW HOOK
SAFETY
Manually release the plug A pressing in the lower part, take the
tow hook from its seat in the tool support and tighten it securely
on the front threaded pin (fig. 159) or on the rear threaded pin
(fig. 160).
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Before beginning to tow, turn the ignition key to
MAR and then to STOP, without extracting it When
the key is removed, the steering wheel lock automatically activates, making it impossible to turn the
wheels.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
196
fig. 159
A0K0136m
fig. 160
A0K0137m
The brake servo and the electrical power steering
will not work while the car is being towed. More
effort on the brake pedal and steering wheel will
therefore be required. Do not use wires for towing. Do not
jerk. Be careful not to damage parts in contact with the
car while towing. Respect the specific rules of the Highway
Code when towing the car, specifically in relation to the
towing device and conduct on the road. Do not start the
engine while towing the car. Clean the threaded seat carefully before fastening the hook. Make sure that the hook
is fully fastened in the seat before towing the car.
The front and rear tow hooks must only be used
for emergency situations on the road. The car may
be towed for short distances when a dedicated device is used in compliance with the Highway Code (rigid
bar), and in order to move the vehicle on the road in
preparation for towing by a tow truck. Tow hooks MUST
NOT be used to tow vehicles off the road or where there
are obstacles and/or for towing operations using cables
or other non-rigid devices. Respecting the above conditions, towing must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along
the same centre line.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
197
blank page
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
IMPORTANT NOTES
Correct maintenance is essential for ensuring long car life under the
best conditions.
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has prepared a series of checks and
service operations to be carried out every 30,000 kilometres (for
1.4 petrol versions) or every 35,000 kilometres (for 1750 Turbo
Petrol and diesel versions).
Check the items on the Scheduled Servicing Plan (e.g. periodically check level of liquids, tyre pressure, etc.) before 30,000/
35,000 km and between these services deadlines.
Scheduled Service operations should be carried out at Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services according to a set time schedule. If, during
each operation, in addition to the ones scheduled, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be carried out only with the explicit agreement of the Customer.
If your car is used frequently for towing, the interval between one
service operation and the next should be reduced.
❍ At 2000 km from the next service operation the display will
show a message.
❍ Scheduled Servicing operations are required by the manufacturer. Failure to comply with the schedule may invalidate the
warranty.
❍ It is advisable to inform Alfa Romeo Authorized Services of any
small faults without waiting for the next scheduled service.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
199
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN
1.4 Turbo Petrol and 1.4 Turbo Multi Air VERSIONS
Thousands of miles
18
36
54
72
90
108
Thousands of km
30
60
90
120
150
180
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure if required
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, passenger
compartment lights, boot lights, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and
operation of pad wear indicator
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check rear disc brake pad condition and wear
●
●
●
●
●
●
Conditions and visual check: bodywork exterior, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - braking system),
rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks,
as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check and top up, if required, fluid levels
(engine coolant, brake/hydraulic clutch fluid, windscreen washer fluid, battery fluid, etc)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check the handbrake lever travel and adjust it, if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
●
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
200
Check condition of timing belt
●
●
Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive belt(s)
●
●
Check exhaust gas emissions
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check battery charge status and possibly recharge
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thousands of miles
18
36
54
72
90
108
Thousands of km
30
60
90
120
150
180
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check engine control system operation (using diagnosis socket)
Replace accessory drive belt(s)
●
Replace toothed timing drive belt (*)
●
Replace spark plugs
●
1
2
●
●
●
●
●
SAFETY
●
●
●
●
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Change pollen filter (or every 15 months)
●
●
Replace air filter cartridge
Change engine oil and oil filter (or every 24 months)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
●
STARTING
AND DRIVING
●
●
●
(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, city driving,
long periods of idling) or at least every 5 years.
1 For 1.4 Turbo Petrol and 1.4 Turbo Multi Air versions, in order to guarantee correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine, it is essential to observe the following:
- only use spark plugs specifically certified for Turbo Petrol engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand
(see the “Engine” paragraph in the “Technical Specifications” chapter);
- adhere strictly to the spark plug replacement intervals detailed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan;
- You are advised to go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the spare plugs replaced.
2 If the car is mainly used in cities or travels less than 10,000 km a year, change the engine oil and filter every 12
months.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
201
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
202
1750 Turbo Petrol VERSIONS
Thousands of miles
21
42
63
84
105
Thousands of km
35
70
105
140
175
Months
24
48
72
96
120
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required
●
●
●
●
●
Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, passenger
compartment lights, boot lights, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation
●
●
●
●
●
Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades
●
●
●
●
●
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator
●
●
●
●
●
Check rear disc brake pad condition and wear
●
●
●
●
●
Conditions and visual check: bodywork exterior, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - braking system),
rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness and lubrication
●
●
●
●
●
Check and top up, if required, fluid levels
(engine coolant, brake/hydraulic clutch fluid, windscreen washer fluid, battery fluid, etc)
●
●
●
●
●
Check the handbrake lever travel and adjust it, if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect the condition of the auxiliary drive belt
●
●
Visually inspect the condition of toothed timing belt
●
●
Thousands of miles
21
42
63
84
105
Thousands of km
35
70
105
140
175
Months
24
48
72
96
120
Check exhaust emissions
●
●
●
●
●
Check battery charge status and possibly recharge
●
●
●
●
●
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic socket)
●
●
●
●
●
Replace accessory drive belt(s)
●
Replace toothed timing belt (*)
●
Replace spark plugs
●
●
Replace air filter cartridge
●
●
●
●
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Change engine oil and oil filter (or every 12 months) (**)
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Change pollen filter (or every 15 months)
●
●
●
●
●
(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every four years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, city driving,
long periods of idling) or at least every five years in all other cases.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
(**) The engine oil and the oil filter must be changed when the instrument panel warning light comes on (see “Warning lights and messages” in “Getting to know your car” chapter) or in any case every 12 months.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
203
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel VERSIONS
Thousands of miles
21
42
63
84
105
Thousands of km
35
70
105
140
175
Months
24
48
72
96
120
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure if required
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights,
luggage compartment, passenger compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation
●
●
●
●
●
Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades
●
●
●
●
●
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator
●
●
●
●
●
Check rear disc brake pad condition and wear
●
●
●
●
●
Conditions and visual check: bodywork exterior, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - braking system),
rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages
●
●
●
●
●
Check and top up, if required, fluid levels
(engine coolant, brake/hydraulic clutch fluid, windscreen washer fluid, battery fluid, etc)
●
●
●
●
●
Check the handbrake lever travel and adjust it, if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
Check exhaust fumes/emissions
●
●
●
●
●
Check battery charge status and possibly recharge
●
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect the condition of the auxiliary drive belt
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic socket)
CONTENTS
204
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thousands of miles
21
42
63
84
105
Thousands of km
35
70
105
140
175
Months
24
48
72
96
120
●
Replace auxiliary drive belts
●
Replace toothed timing drive belt (*)
Replace fuel filter
●
●
Replace air filter cartridge
●
●
●
●
SAFETY
Change engine oil and oil filter (**)(or every 24 months)
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Change pollen filter (or every 15 months)
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
●
●
●
●
STARTING
AND DRIVING
●
(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, city driving,
long periods of idling) or at least every 5 years.
(**) The engine oil and oil filter should be changed when the warning light on the dashboard comes on, or every 24 months.
If the car is mainly used in town, change the engine oil and filter every 12 months.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
205
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
206
REGULAR CHECKS
DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and top up the following if necessary:
❍ engine coolant level, brake fluid and windscreen washer fluid
❍ tyre pressure and condition;
❍ operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators,
hazard lights, etc.);
❍ operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system, position
and wear of windscreen/rear window wiper blades;
Check and top up, if required, the engine oil level every 3,000 km.
If you use the car mainly under one of the following conditions:
❍ trailer or caravan towing;
❍ dusty roads;
❍ short (less than 7-8 km) and repeated journeys in sub-zero
temperatures;
❍ frequent engine idling, travelling long distances at low speeds
or long term inactivity;
perform the following inspections more frequently than shown on
the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
❍ check front disc brake pad condition and wear;
❍ check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages;
❍ visually inspect the conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes and tubes (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);
❍ check battery charge and liquid level (electrolyte);
❍ visually inspect the condition of auxiliary drive belts;
❍ check and if necessary change engine oil and oil filter;
❍ check pollen filter and replace it, if required;
❍ check air filter and replace, if required.
CHECKING LEVELS
Be careful not to confuse the various types of fluids while topping up: they are all incompatible with
each other and may severely damage your car.
Proceed very carefully inside the engine compartment when the engine is hot: risk of burns. Remember that the fan may start up if the engine is
hot: this could injure you. Make sure that scarves, ties and
other loose fitting garments do not get caught up in moving parts.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Never smoke while working in the engine compartment: flammable gases may be present. Risk
of fire.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
207
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 161 - 1.4 Turbo Petrol versions
208
A0K0335m
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 162 - 1.4 Turbo Multi Air versions
A0K0336m
209
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 163 - 1750 Turbo Petrol versions
210
A0K0337m
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 164 - 1.6 JTDM – 2.0 JTDM versions
A0K0338m
211
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
212
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE COOLANT
Check that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX references
on the dipstick A-fig. 161-162-163-164.
If the oil level is near or under the MIN line, add oil through the
filler A until it reaches the MAX line.
If the level is too low, undo reservoir cap C-fig. 161-162-163-164
and add the fluid described in “Technical Specifications” chapter.
The oil level must never exceed the MAX line.
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the
engine to cool down before loosening the filler plug,
particularly for vehicles with aluminium plug (for
versions/markets where provided). CAUTION: risk of burns!
Engine oil consumption
The maximum engine oil consumption is usually 400 grams every
1000 km. During the initial period of use the engine oil consumption
conditions should be considered as having stabilised after the first
5000 - 6000 km.
Do not add oil with different characteristics to those
of the existing engine oil.
Used engine oil and the replaced oil filter contain
substances that are harmful to the environment.
We recommend having the oil and oil filter replaced by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
PARAFLUUP anti-freeze is used in the engine cooling system. Use the same fluid as in the cooling
system when topping up. PARAFLUUP may not be
mixed with any other type of fluid. If this accidentally
occurs, do not start the engine. Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
The engine cooling system is pressurised. If the cap
needs replacing, do so with another original or the
effectiveness of the system may be compromised.
Do not remove the cap from the reservoir when the engine is hot: you may get burned
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW/
HEADLIGHT WASHING FLUID
If the level is too low undo reservoir cap D-fig. 161-162-163164 and add the fluid described in the “Technical Specifications”
chapter.
IMPORTANT The headlight washer system will not work when
the liquid level is low although the windscreen/rear window washer will still work. For versions/markets where provided (see previous pages), a reference line E-fig. 161, 162, 163, 164 is provided: ONLY the windscreen/rear window washer will work under this line.
Do not travel if the windscreen washer reservoir is
empty: using the windscreen washer is essential
for improving visibility. Repeated operation of the
system when it is empty could damage or rapidly deteriorate some of its parts
BRAKE FLUID
Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. If the level is too
low undo reservoir cap F-fig. 161-162-163-164 and add the fluid described in the “Technical Specifications” chapter.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Prevent brake fluid, which is highly corrosive, from
coming into contact with painted parts. Should this
occur, immediately wash with water.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Brake fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. In
the event of accidental contact, wash the parts immediately with water and neutral soap, then rinse
with plenty of water. In case of swallowing, immediately
call a doctor.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Some commercial windscreen washer additives are
flammable. The engine compartment contains hot
parts which could cause a fire if they come into contact with these additives.
The symbol π on the container indicates a synthetic brake fluid, which is different from a mineral fluid. Using a mineral-type fluid will damage
the special rubber seals of the braking system beyond repair.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
213
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER/
DIESEL FILTER
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace these
filters.
BATTERY
The electrolyte of the battery G-fig. 161-162-163-164 does not
need to be topped up with distilled water. A periodic check carried
out at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services is, however, necessary to
check efficiency.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
When necessary, replace the battery with another original battery
with the same specifications. Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance.
ADVICE FOR PROLONGING
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
To avoid rapidly draining your battery and to prolong its life, observe the following indications:
❍ when you park the car, ensure the doors, tailgate and bonnet
are closed properly in order to avoid the courtesy lights remaining on for longer than necessary;
❍ turn off the ceiling lights, although the car does have an automatic system for switching off internal lights;
❍ do not leave devices (e.g. car radio, hazard lights, etc.)
switched on for a long time when the engine is not running;
❍ before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the battery negative terminal.
CONTENTS
IMPORTANT The steering system will need to be initialised after disconnecting the battery. A warning light g will come on to indicate this. Simply turn the steering wheel all the way to one end
or simply drive on a straight line for a few hundred metres.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
214
IMPORTANT If the battery remains with the charge below 50%
for a long time it becomes damaged through sulphation and its
starting capacity is reduced.
The battery will also be more at risk of freezing (this can happen
as early as –10°C). Refer to “Storing the car” in “Starting and
driving” if the car is left parked for a long time.
If after having purchased your car you decide to add accessories requiring permanent electrical power (alarm etc.) or accessories that
require large amounts of power, please consult Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement.
The battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid
contact with the skin and the eyes. Keep naked
flames or possible sources of sparks away from the
battery: risk of explosion or fire.
Incorrect assembly of electric and electronic devices
may cause severe damage to your car. Go to an
Alfa Romeo Authorised Service Provider if you want
to install accessories after having purchased your car
(alarms, mobile phone, etc.): they will be able to suggest
the most suitable devices and advise you if a higher capacity battery needs to be installed.
Batteries contain substances that are very dangerous for the environment. Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to replace the battery.
If the car must remain unused for a long time at
very low temperatures, remove the battery and
take it to a warm place, to avoid freezing.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Using the battery when the fluid is too low damages it irreparably and can cause an explosion.
When performing any operation on the battery
or near it, always protect your eyes with special goggles.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
215
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
WHEELS AND TYRES
Before embarking on a long trip, and every two weeks, check the
tyre inflation pressure (and space-saver wheel); check the pressure
with the tyres cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase when the car is used; for
the correct tyre inflation pressure, see “Wheels” in the “Technical
specifications” section.
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear fig. 165:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges.
C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre.
The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than 1.6 mm
thick.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
216
fig. 165
A0K0023m
IMPORTANT NOTES
Take the following precautions to prevent damage to the tyres:
❍ avoid braking suddenly, racing starts and violent impact against
the curb, potholes or other obstacles and driving for extended
periods on unsurfaced roads;
❍ check the tyres regularly for cuts on the sides, swelling or irregular tread wear;
❍ avoid travelling with the vehicle overloaded. If you puncture a
tyre, stop immediately and replace it;
❍ have the tyres checked by specialised personnel if they have
been fitted for longer than 6 years. Remember to check the
space-saver wheel very carefully;
❍ change the position of the tyres every 10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the same side of the vehicle to avoid
inverting the direction of rotation.
❍ a tyre will age even if it is not used much. Cracks in the tread
and on the sidewalls are a sign of ageing. In any event, have
the tyres checked by specialised personnel if they have been
fitted for longer than six years. Remember to check the spacesaver wheel very carefully;
❍ when replacing the tyres, always fit new tyres, avoiding those
of dubious origin;
❍ If a tyre is replaced, you should also change the inflation valve.
Remember that the road holding qualities of your
car also depend on the correct inflation pressure
of the tyres.
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW
WIPERS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Driving with worn wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather.
If the pressure is too low, the tyre will overheat and
could be seriously damaged.
Avoid switching the tyres from the right side of the
vehicle to the left side and vice versa.
Do not repaint alloy wheel rims at temperatures
higher than 150°C. The mechanical characteristics
of the wheels might be compromised.
SAFETY
BLADES
We recommend replacing the blades once a year.
A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility of damage to
the blades:
❍ make sure that the rubber part is not frozen to the windscreen
in sub-zero temperatures. Use a de-icing product to release it
if required;
❍ remove any snow from the window;
❍ do not activate the windscreen/rear window wiper on a dry
window.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
217
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Lifting the wiper blades
Proceed as follows:
❍ lift the windscreen wiper arm, press the tab A-fig. 166 of the
fastening clip and extract the blade from the arm;
❍ fit the new blade, inserting the tab into the dedicated housing
in the arm. Make sure that the new blade is secured in position.
❍ lower the windscreen wiper arm on the windscreen.
When the wiper blades have to be lifted from the windscreen (i.e.
in the event of snow), proceed as follows:
❍ turn the ignition key to the MAR position;
❍ operate the lever to the right of the steering wheel to activate
a windscreen wiper stroke (see paragraph "Window washing" in chapter "Getting to know your car");
❍ turn the ignition key to the STOP position when the driver's
side wiper blade reaches the windscreen side pillar and lift the
windscreen wiper to the rest position;
❍ bring the wiper blades back into contact with the windscreen
before activating the windscreen wiper.
Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the
blades lifted from the windscreen.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
218
fig. 166
A0K0144m
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
SPRAY NOZZLES
Proceed as follows:
❍ lift cover A-fig. 167, undo nut B and remove arm C;
❍ correctly position the new arm, fully tighten nut B and then
lower cover A.
Windscreen washer fig. 168
The window washer jets are fixed.
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly check that there is fluid in the
reservoir: see “Checking fluid levels” paragraph in this section).
Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged, if necessary using a needle.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 167
A0K0101m
fig. 168
A0K0139m
219
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Rear window washer fig. 169
The nozzle holder is located above the rear window. The rear window washer jets are fixed.
HEADLAMP WASHERS fig. 170
(on request for versions/markets, where provided)
These are located within the front bumper. They are activated when
the dipped beam and/or main beam headlights are on and the
windscreen washer is activated.
Check the condition and cleanliness of nozzles at regular intervals.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
220
fig. 169
A0K0102m
fig. 170
A0K0138m
BODYWORK
BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Your car is covered by warranty against perforation, due to rust,
of any original element of the structure or bodywork. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to your Warranty Booklet.
The car is equipped with the best available technological solutions
to protect the bodywork against corrosion.
These are the most important:
❍ paint products and systems which give the car resistance to corrosion and abrasion;
❍ use of galvanised (or pre-treated) steel sheets with high resistance to corrosion;
❍ spraying protective plastic materials in the most exposed areas: underdoor, inner mudguard parts, edges, etc.;
❍ using “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisture from causing rust inside.
❍ use of special films to protect against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Paint
Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formation of rust.
Maintenance of paintwork consists of washing the car: the frequency depends on the conditions and environment where the
car is used. For example, it is advisable to wash the car more often in areas with high environmental pollution or salted roads.
To correctly wash the car:
❍ remove the aerial from the roof when using a carwash;
❍ in washing stations keep the steam jet/high pressure washing
nozzles at least 40 cm away from the bodywork to prevent damage. It should be remembered that a build up of water could
cause damage, in the long term, to the car.
❍ wash the body using a low pressure jet of water;
❍ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge;
❍ rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or chamois leather.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
221
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
When drying take care to dry the least visible parts where the
water could collect most easily. Do not wash the car after it has
been left in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the shine
of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest
of the car.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Use specific detergents and clean cloths to prevent scratching.
IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window gently with a cloth in the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device.
Front headlights
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Windows
Detergents cause water pollution. Only wash the
car in areas equipped for the collection and purification of the fluids used in the actual washing
process.
In order to preserve the aesthetic appearance of
the paintwork abrasive products and/or polishes
should not be used for cleaning the car.
Use a soft, damp cloth soaked in water and detergent for washing cars.
IMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g. petrol) or ketenes
(e.g. acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of the front headlights.
IMPORTANT When cleaning the car with a pressure washer, keep
the water jet at least 2 cm away from the headlights.
Engine compartment
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
222
IMPORTANT
Avoid parking under trees; the resin dropped by trees makes the
paintwork go opaque and increasing the possibility of corrosion.
Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.
At the end of every winter, wash the engine compartment thoroughly, taking care not to aim the jet of water directly at the electronic control units or at the windscreen wiper motors. Have this
operation performed at a specialised workshop.
IMPORTANT The washing should take place with the engine cold
and the ignition key in the STOP position. After the wash, make
sure that the various protective devices (e.g. rubber caps and
guards) have not been removed or damaged.
INTERIORS
LEATHER SEATS
(on request for versions/markets, where provided)
Periodically check for water puddles under the mats that could cause
the panels to rust.
Remove the dry dirt with a buckskin or slightly damp cloth, without exercising too much pressure.
Remove liquid or oil stains using a dry absorbent cloth, without rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin cloth dampened with
water and neutral soap.
If the stain persists, use specific products and observe the instructions carefully.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a moist brush on velvet upholstery. Wipe the seats with
a sponge soaked in a solution of neutral detergent and water.
IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning products used contain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small
quantities.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
PLASTIC PARTS AND COVERS
Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if possible made from
microfibre), and a solution of water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent. To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products free
from solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance
and colour of the components.
Remove any dust using a microfibre cloth, if necessary moistened
with water. The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these
may leave residues.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT Never use alcohol or petrol to clean the glass on the
instrument panel or other plastic parts.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
223
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
LEATHER UPHOLSTERY
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Use only water and neutral soap to clean these parts. Never use
alcohol or alcohol-based products.
Before using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure
that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
224
Never use flammable products, such as petroleum
ether or modified petrol, to clean inside the car.
The electrostatic charges which are generated by
rubbing during cleaning may cause a fire.
Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle: these could
explode. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to a
temperature exceeding 50°C. When the vehicle
is exposed to sunlight, the internal temperature can greatly exceed this value.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
VIN PLATE fig. 171
The identification details of the car are:
❍ VIN plate
❍ Chassis marking;
❍ Bodywork paint identification plate.
❍ Engine marking
It is applied to the front crossmember and shows the following
data:
B Type-approval number
C Vehicle type identification code
D Chassis number
E Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden
F Maximum permitted weight of vehicle fully laden plus trailer
G Maximum permitted weight on first (front) axle
H Maximum permitted weight on second (rear) axle
I Engine type.
L Bodywork version code.
M Number for spare parts.
N Correct smoke opacity index (for diesel engines).
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 171
A0K0024m
225
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
CHASSIS MARKING fig. 172
This is printed on the passenger compartment floor bed near the
front right seat. Slide the hatch A forward to access.
The marking includes:
❍ vehicle type (ZAR 940000)
❍ chassis number
BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
fig. 173
It is applied under the bonnet and shows the following data:
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
C Fiat colour code.
D Re-spray and touch-up colour code.
ENGINE MARKING
STARTING
AND DRIVING
This is printed onto the cylinder block and shows the type and
production serial number.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
226
fig. 172
A0K0175m
fig. 173
A0K0025m
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS
Engine code
Bodywork versions
1.4 Turbo Petrol
198A4000
940FXA1A 00
940FXA1A 00B (**)
1.4 Turbo Petrol (*)
940A6000
940FXF1A 05
940FXF1A 05B (**)
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
940A2000
940FXB1A 01
940FXB1A 01B (**)
1.4 Turbo Multi Air (*)
955A8000
940FXG1A 06
940FXG1A 06B (**)
1750 Turbo Petrol
940A1000
940FXC1A 02
1.6 JTDM
940A3000
940FXD1A 03
940FXD1A 03B (**)
2.0 JTDM
940A4000
940FXE1A 04
940FXE1A 04B (**)
2.0 JTDM 136 HP (*)
940A8000
940FXM1A 09
940FXL1M 09B (**)
2.0 JTDM 140 HP (*)
940A5000
940FXL1A 08
940FXL1A 08B (**)
2.0 JTDM 163 HP (*)
940A7000
940FXH1A 07
940FXH1A 07B (**)
(*) For versions/markets, where provided
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(**) Versions with oversized brake calipers
CONTENTS
227
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
ENGINE
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.4
Turbo Petrol
1.4 Turbo
Multi Air
1750
Turbo Petrol
Type code
198A4000
940A6000 (*)
940A2000
955A8000 (*)
940A1000
Otto
Otto
Otto
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
Cycle
Cylinder number and position
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Piston bore and stroke
mm
72.0 x 84.0
72.0 x 84.0
83.0 x 80.5
Total capacity
cm
1368
1368
1742
9.8
9,8
9.8
3
Compression ratio
Max. EEC power
IN AN
EMERGENCY
corresponding speed
Max. EEC torque
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
corresponding speed
Spark plugs
Fuel
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(*) For versions/markets, where provided
CONTENTS
228
kW
HP
rpm
Nm
kgm
rpm
88
120
5000
85 (*)
115 (*)
5000 (*)
206
21
1750
125
170
5500
NORMAL
230
23.4
2250
120 (*)
163 (*)
5500 (*)
DYNAMIC
250
25.4
2500
172.5
235
5500
NORMAL DYNAMIC
300
340
30.5
34.6
4500
1900
NGK IKR9F8
NGK IKR9F8
NGK ILKAR7D6G
Unleaded petrol
95 RON
(EN228
specifications)
Unleaded petrol
95 RON
or 98 RON
(EN228 specifications)
Unleaded petrol
95 RON
or 98 RON
(EN228 specifications)
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM
2.0 JTDM (*)
2.0 JTDM (*)
Type code
940A3000
940A4000
940A7000
940A8000 (**)
940A5000
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
Cycle
Cylinder number and position
Piston bore and stroke
mm
79.5 x 80.5
83 x 90.4
83 x 90.4
83 x 90.4
Total capacity
cm3
1598
1956
1956
1956
16.5
16.5
16.5
16.5
77
105
4000
NORMAL DYNAMIC
280
320
28.5
32.5
1500
1750
125
170
4000
NORMAL DYNAMIC
320
350
32.5
35.6
1500
1750
120
163
4000
NORMAL DYNAMIC
320
350
32.5
35.6
1500
1750
100/103
136/140
3750
NORMAL DYNAMIC
320
350
32.5
35.6
1500
1750
–
–
–
–
Automotive
diesel fuel
(EN590
specifications)
Automotive
diesel fuel
(EN590
specifications)
Automotive
diesel fuel
(EN590
specifications)
Automotive
diesel fuel
(EN590
specifications)
Compression ratio
Max. EEC power
corresponding speed
Max. EEC torque
corresponding speed
kW
HP
rpm
Nm
kgm
rpm
Spark plugs
Fuel
(*) For versions/markets, where provided
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(**) 2.0 JTDM 136 HP version
CONTENTS
229
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel supply
SAFETY
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
1.4 Turbo Petrol
1750 Turbo Petrol
1.6 JTDM - 2.0 JTDM
Electronic sequential
phased injection with
knock control and variable
intake valve actuation
Multipoint sequential
phased electronic injection,
electronically controlled
with turbo and
intercooler
Common Rail Multijet
direct injection
electronically controlled
with turbo and intercooler
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TRANSMISSION
1.4 Turbo Petrol - 1.4 Turbo Multi Air - 1750 Turbo Petrol - 1.6 JTDM - 2.0 JTDM
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
230
Gearbox
Six forward gears plus reverse with synchronisers for
forward gears
Clutch
Self-adjusting with no free travel
Drive
Front
Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out properly or do not take the technical
specifications of the system into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
BRAKES
1.4 Turbo Petrol - 1.4 Turbo Multi Air - 1750 Turbo Petrol - 1.6 JTDM - 2.0 JTDM
Service brakes:
– front
Self-ventilated discs
– rear
Disc
Parking brake
Controlled by hand lever, acting on rear brakes
IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt sprinkled on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes
are applied.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
SUSPENSIONS
1.4 Turbo Petrol - 1.4 Turbo Multi Air - 1750 Turbo Petrol - 1.6 JTDM - 2.0 JTDM
Front
Mc Pherson independent wheel with anti-roll bar
Rear
Multi-link structure system
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
STEERING SYSTEM
1.4 Turbo Petrol - 1.4 Turbo Multi Air - 1750 Turbo Petrol - 1.6 JTDM - 2.0 JTDM
Type
Turning circle
(kerb to kerb)
Rack and pinion with electro-mechanical power steering (Dual Pinion architecture)
m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
10.9
CONTENTS
231
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
WHEELS
Load index (capacity)
RIMS AND TYRES
60 = 250kg
61 = 257kg
62 = 265kg
63 = 272kg
64 = 280kg
65 = 290kg
66 = 300kg
67 = 307kg
68 = 315kg
69 = 325kg
70 = 335kg
71 = 345kg
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Radial type tubeless tyres. All approved
tyres are listed in the Log Book.
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepancies between the information
provided in this “Owner’s handbook” and the “Log book”, consider the specifications shown in the log book only.
Comply with the prescribed size to ensure safety of the car in movement. Fit tyres of the same make and type on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes with Tubeless tyres.
SPACE SAVER SPARE WHEEL
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressed steel rim Tubeless tyre.
72 = 355kg
73 = 365kg
74 = 375kg
75 = 387kg
76 = 400kg
77 = 412kg
78 = 425kg
79 = 437kg
80 = 450kg
81 = 462kg
82 = 475kg
83 = 487kg
84 = 500kg
85 = 515kg
86 = 530kg
87 = 545kg
88 = 560kg
89 = 580kg
90 = 600kg
91 = 615kg
92 = 630kg
93 = 650kg
94 = 670kg
95 = 690kg
96 = 710kg
97 = 730kg
98 = 750kg
99 = 775kg
100 = 800kg
101 = 825kg
102 = 850kg
103 = 875kg
104 = 900kg
105 = 925kg
106 = 950kg
HOW TO READ TYRE MARKINGS fig. 174
Example: 205/55 R 16 91 V
205 = Nominal width (S, distance in mm between sidewalls).
55 = Height/width ratio (H/S) as a percentage.
R = Radial tyre.
16 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).
91 = Load index.
V = Maximum speed index.
CONTENTS
232
fig. 174
A0K0043m
Maximum speed index
Q
R
S
T
U
=
=
=
=
=
up to 160 km/h.
up to 170 km/h.
up to 180 km/h.
up to 190 km/h.
up to 200 km/h.
RIM PROTECTORS fig. 175
H=
V =
W=
Y =
up to 210 km/h.
up to 240 km/h.
up to 270 km/h.
up to 300 km/h.
DO NOT fit wheel cups when using integral cups
fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and tyres other than factory-fitted tyres provided with Rim Protector (fig. 175). Use of unsuitable tyres and wheel cups
may cause sudden loss of tyre pressure.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Maximum speed rating
for snow tyres
QM + S = up to 160 km/h.
TM + S = up to 190 km/h.
HM + S = up to 210 km/h.
STARTING
AND DRIVING
HOW TO READ RIM MARKINGS fig. 174
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Example: 7J x 16 H2 ET 41
7 = rim diameter in inches (1).
J = rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead
rests) (2).
16 = rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to diameter
of the tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø).
H2 = shape and number of humps (used for withholding tubeless
tyre beads on the rim).
ET 41 = wheel camber angle (distance between the disc/rim supporting plane and the wheel rim centre line).
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
fig. 175
A0K0159m
233
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Versions
Wheels
7Jx16 H2 ET 41 (*)
7Jx16 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED (**) 225/40 R18 92Q REINFORCED
1.4 Turbo Petrol (❍)
1.6 JTDM (❍)
7 /2 Jx17 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED (**) 225/40 R18 92Q REINFORCED
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
2.0 JTDM
7Jx16 H2 ET 41 (*)
7Jx16 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED (**) 225/40 R18 92Q REINFORCED
1.4 Turbo Multi Air (❍)
2.0 JTDM (❍)
71/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED (**) 225/40 R18 92Q REINFORCED
1750 Turbo Petrol
71/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41
71/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED (**) 225/40 R18 92Q REINFORCED
1
Space-saver spare wheel
Tyre
Rim
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED (*) 195/55 R16 91Q REINFORCED (*)
205/55 R16 91V
225/45 R17 91W
225/45 R17 91W
205/55 R16 91Q
225/45 R17 91Q
225/45 R17 91Q
T135/70 R16 100M
T125/80 R17 99M
4B x 16 ET 22
4B x 17 ET 25
T125/80 R17 99M
4B x 17 ET 25
T135/70 R16 100M
T125/80 R17 99M
4B x 16 ET 22
4B x 17 ET 25
T125/80 R17 99M
4B x 17 ET 25
T125/80 R17 99M
4B x 17 ET 25
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED (*) 195/55 R16 91Q REINFORCED (*)
205/55 R16 91V
225/45 R17 91W
225/45 R17 91W
225/45 R17 91W
205/55 R16 91Q
225/45 R17 91Q
225/45 R17 91Q
225/45 R17 91Q
Snow chain use
All versions: for 195/55 R16”, 205/55 R16” and 225/45 R17” size tyres use low-clearance snow chains with a maximum protrusion beyond the
tyre profile of 9 mm.
(*) For versions/markets, where provided
(❍) Versions with oversized brake calipers
234
Snow
1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.6 JTDM
(**) Tyres not suitable for fitting snow chains.
CONTENTS
Tyres
Provided
COLD TYRE PRESSURES (bar)
Versions
Size
STANDARD TYRES
Medium load
1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.6 JTDM
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED
205/55 R16 91V
225/45 R17 91W
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
2.0 JTDM
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED
205/55 R16 91V
225/45 R17 91W
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED
1750 Turbo Petrol
225/45 R17 91W
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED
Space-saver spare
wheel
T135/70 R16 100M
T125/80 R17 99M
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Full load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
2.6
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.2
2.1
2.1
2.2
3.0
2.7
2.7
3.0
2.6
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.6
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.2
2.1
2.1
2.2
3.0
2.7
2.7
3.0
2.6
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.3
2.6
2.1
2.2
2.7
3.0
2.3
2.6
4.2
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm. Check correct pressure on a cold tyre.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the pressure prescribed for standard tyres.
When running at speeds higher than 160 km/h, inflate tyres at full-load pressures.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
235
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its original tyres.
Height is measured with vehicle unladen.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
236
BOOT VOLUME
Unladen capacity (V.D.A. standards): 350 dm3
A0K0133m
A
B
C
D
E
F
4351
955
2634
762
1465
1554
Small variations in size are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.
G
1798
H
1554
PERFORMANCE
Versions
Top speed (km/h)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
1.4 Turbo Petrol
195
9.4
1.4 Turbo Petrol (*)
192
9.4
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
218
7.8
1.4 Turbo Multi Air (*)
215
7.8
1750 Turbo Petrol
242
6.8
1.6 JTDM
185
11.3
2.0 JTDM
218
8.0
2.0 JTDM 136 HP (*)
205
—
2.0 JTDM 140 HP (*)
205
9.0
2.0 JTDM 163 HP (*)
215
8.0
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(*) For versions/markets, where provided
CONTENTS
237
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
238
WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)
1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without
optional equipment):
1280
1290
1320
Payload (*)
including the driver:
505
505
505
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle :
– rear axle:
– total:
1100
850
1785
1100
850
1795
1100
850
1825
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non-braked trailer:
1300
500
1300
500
1300
500
Maximum load on roof:
50
50
50
Maximum load on the ball joint
(braked trailer):
60
60
60
(*)
1750 Turbo Petrol
If special equipment is fitted (sun roof, trailer towing equipment, etc.) the unladen weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.
(**) Loads that must not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/on load carrying platform within the maximum permitted loads.
Weights (kg)
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
1310
1320
Payload (*)
including the driver:
505
505
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1100
850
1815
1100
850
1825
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non-braked trailer:
1300
500
1300
500
Maximum load on roof:
50
50
Maximum load on the ball joint
(braked trailer):
60
60
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sun roof, trailer towing equipment, etc.) the unladen weight will increase and consequently the payload will
decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.
(**) Loads that must not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/on load carrying platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
239
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
240
CAPACITIES
1.4 Turbo Petrol
litres
kg
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
60
8 - 10
1.4 Turbo Multi Air
litres
kg
–
–
60
8 - 10
–
–
1750 Turbo Petrol
litres
kg
60
8 - 10
–
–
Prescribed fuel
and genuine lubricants
Unleaded petrol
not less than 95 R.O.N
(EN228 specifications)
5.7
5.0
5.7
5.0
6.4
5.7
Mixture of demineralised
water and PARAFLUUP
in 50-50 proportion (▲)
2.75
2.3
3.1
2.6
5.0
4.25
SELENIA StAR P.E.
3.1
2.6
3.5
2.9
5.1
4.35
Gearbox/differential
casing:
1.87
1.6
1.87
1.6
1.87
1.6
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
GEARFORCE
Hydraulic brake circuit
with ABS:
0.83
0.78
0.83
0.78
0.83
0.78
TUTELA TOP 4
Windscreen/
rear window/
headlight
liquid reservoir (*):
2.8
(4.6)
2.5
(4.1)
2.8
(4.6)
2.5
(4.1)
2.8
(4.6)
2.5
(4.1)
Engine cooling system
– with climate
control:
Engine sump:
Engine sump and
filter:
Water and liquid mixture
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
(▲) When the car is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40% of demineralised water.
(*) The figures in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
1.6 JTDM
litres
kg
2.0 JTDM
litres
kg
60
8 - 10
60
8 - 10
–
–
–
–
Prescribed fuel
and genuine lubricants
Automotive diesel
(EN590 specifications)
6.8
6.0
6.7
5.9
Mixture of demineralised
water and PARAFLUUP in
50-50 proportion (▲)
4.0
3.4
4.0
3.4
SELENIA WR P.E.
4.2
3.5
4.2
3.5
Gearbox/differential
casing:
1.87
1.6
1.87
1.6
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
GEARFORCE
Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS:
0.83
0.78
0.83
0.78
TUTELA TOP 4
Windscreen/rear window/
headlight liquid reservoir (*):
2.8
(4.6)
2.5
(4.1)
2.8
(4.6)
2.5
(4.1)
Water and liquid mixture
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
Engine cooling system
- with climate
control:
Engine sump:
Engine sump and
filter:
(▲) When the car is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU and 40% of demineralised water.
UP
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
(*) The figures in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
241
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Use
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Fluid and lubricant features
for correct use of the car
Genuine
fluids and lubricants
Frequency
of replacement
Petrol engine
lubricants
SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3 grade totally synthetic lubricant
FIAT 9.55535-S2 certification.
SELENIA StAR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F603.D08
As per the
Scheduled
Servicing Plan
Diesel engine
lubricants
SAE 5W-30 grade totally synthetic lubricant
FIAT 9.55535-S1 certification.
SELENIA WR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F510.D07
As per the
Scheduled
Servicing Plan
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
242
For diesel engines, in the event of an emergency in which the original products are not available, lubricants with at least ACEA C2 performance are
acceptable; however, in this case optimum engine performance is not guaranteed and the lubricants should be replaced with recommended products
as soon as possible at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
The use of products with features lower than ACEA A3 (petrol engines) and ACEA C2 (diesel engines) could cause engine damage not covered by warranty.
For petrol engines with Multi Air system, use of lubricants with features lower than ACEA C3 and SAE grade other than 5W-40 could cause engine
damage which is not covered by warranty.
Use
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct use of the car
Genuine
fluids and lubricants
Applications
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAE 75W grade synthetic lubricant.
FIAT 9.55550-MZ6 qualification
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
GEARFORCE
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F002.F10
Gearboxes and
differentials
(mechanical)
Grease for constant-velocity joints with low
friction coefficient. NL.GI. 0-1 consistency
FIAT 9.55580 qualification
TUTELA STAR 700
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F701.C07
Differential side
constant-velocity joints
Molybdenum disulphide grease for high temperatures.
NL.GI. 1-2 consistency
FIAT 9.55580 qualification
TUTELA ALL STAR
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F702.G07
CV joints
wheel side
Brake
fluid
Synthetic fluid for braking and clutch systems
Exceeds specifications: FMVSS n. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925,
SAE J 1704. Qualification FIAT 9.55597
TUTELA TOP 4
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F001.A93
Hydraulic brakes and
hydraulically operated
clutch
Protective agent
for radiators
Red protective with antifreeze action, based on inhibited
monoethylene glycol with organic formula.
Exceeding CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.
PARAFLU (●)
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F101.M01
Cooling circuits
proportions of use:
50% water
50% PARAFLUUP (❑)
Additive
for diesel fuel
Additive for diesel with antifreeze and protective action for
diesel engines.
TUTELA DIESEL ART
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F601.L06
To be mixed with fuel
oil (25 cc per 10 litres)
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Windscreen/
rear window/
headlamp
washer fluid
level
Mixture of spirits and surfactants.
Exceeds CUNA NC 956-11 specifications.
FIAT 9.55522 qualification
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F201.D02
To be used diluted or
undiluted in windscreen/ rear window
washer/wiper systems
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricants
for motion
transmission
UP
(●) IMPORTANT Do not use fluids with different specifications for topping up or mixing.
(❑) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLUUP and distilled water.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
243
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the homologation tests laid down by specific
European Directives.
The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:
❍ urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates
urban use of the car;
❍ extra urban cycle: driving simulating the use of the vehicle in
a non-urban situation with frequent acceleration in all gears;
the speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h;
❍ combined consumption: about 37% of the urban cycle and
around 63% of the non-urban cycle.
FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE (litres/100 km)
1.4
1.4 Turbo
1750
Turbo Petrol
Multi Air
Turbo Petrol
Urban cycle
8.4
7.8
10.8
5.5
5.6
5.8
5.6
Extra urban cycle
5.3
4.6
5.8
3.7
3.9
4.1
3.9
Combined consumption
6.4
5.8
7.6
4.4
4.5
4.7
4.5
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
244
IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic situations, weather conditions,
driving style, general conditions of the car, trim level/
equipment/accessories, load, climate control system, roof rack,
other situations that affect air drag may lead to different fuel consumption levels than those measured.
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM
2.0 JTDM
2.0 JTDM
136 HP
163 HP/170 HP
140 HP
CO2 EMISSIONS
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
The CO2 emission levels at the exhaust given in the following table refer to combined consumption.
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES (g/km)
1.4
Turbo Petrol
1.4
Turbo Multi Air
1750
Turbo Petrol
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM
136 HP
2.0 JTDM
163 HP/170 HP
2.0 JTDM
140 HP
149
134
177
114
119
124
119
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
245
blank page
PRESENTATION........................ 248
Tips ............................................ 248
Technical specifications .................. 250
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE ...... 251
Steering wheel controls ................ 254
General information ...................... 256
FUNCTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 257
Switching the sound system ........... 257
Switching the sound system ........... 257
Selecting radio functions ................ 257
Selecting CD function ..................... 257
Audio source memory function ........ 257
Volume adjustment ....................... 257
Mute/Pause function .................... 258
Audio adjustments ........................ 258
Tone adjustment ........................... 259
Balance adjustment ...................... 259
Fader adjustment ......................... 259
Loudness function ......................... 260
Menu .......................................... 261
Telephone setup ........................... 267
Anti-theft protection ....................... 267
(where provided)
RADIO (TUNER)....................... 269
Introduction ................................. 269
Selecting a frequency band ............ 269
Preset buttons .............................. 269
Storing the last station listened to ... 269
Automatic tuning .......................... 270
Manual tuning ............................. 270
AutoSTore function ........................ 270
Emergency alarm reception ............ 271
EON function ............................... 271
Stereo stations ............................. 271
CD PLAYER .............................. 272
Introduction ................................. 272
Selecting the CD player ................ 272
Loading/ejecting a CD .................. 272
Display readings ........................... 273
Track selection .............................. 273
CD MP3 PLAYER...................... 274
Introduction ................................. 274
MP3 mode .................................. 274
Selecting MP3 sessions
on hybrid discs ............................. 275
Display readings ........................... 275
Select next/previous folder ........... 275
Structure of the folders .................. 275
AUX (only with Blue&Me™)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)............................ 276
Introduction ................................. 276
AUX mode ................................... 276
SOUND SYSTEM
SOUND SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING ............... 277
General ....................................... 277
CD player .................................... 277
MP3 File reading .......................... 277
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 273
Pause function ............................. 273
247
INTRODUCTION
SOUND SYSTEM
The radio has been designed according to
the passenger compartment’s specific characteristics and with a personalised design
that is incorporated perfectly with the style
of the dashboard.
The instructions for use are given below. We
recommend that you read them carefully.
248
TIPS
Road safety
Familiarise yourself with the various car radio functions (e.g. storing radio stations),
before starting to drive.
Reception conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
IMPORTANT The volume may be increased
when receiving traffic bulletins.
If the volume is too loud this
could be dangerous for the
driver and for passengers when driving in traffic. Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises.
Care and maintenance
Only clean the cover with a soft, anti-static
cloth. Cleaning and polishing products could
damage the surface.
❍ clean every CD to remove any fingerprints or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs
by the circumference and clean them
from the middle outwards;
❍ never use chemicals (e.g. anti-static
products or thinners or sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface of
the CDs;
❍ after listening, place CDs back in their
cases to avoid damaging them;
❍ do not expose CDs to direct sunlight,
high temperatures or damp for long periods;
❍ do not stick labels on the surface of the
CD and do not write on the recorded surface using pens or pencils;
❍ do not use CDs that are clearly
scratched, flawed, distorted, etc. Using
discs like this will result in malfunctions
or damage to the player;
❍ to achieve the best quality audio reproduction we recommend the use of original CD media. If CD-R/RWs that have
not been correctly recorded and/or with
a maximum capacity above 650 MB are
used, correct operation is not guaranteed;
❍ do not use the protective sleeves sold
for CDs or discs with stabilizers, etc. because they may get stuck in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc;
❍ if copy-protected CDs are used, it may
take a few seconds before the system
starts playing them. The CD player is not
guaranteed to play all copy-protected
discs. The fact that the CD is protected
from being copied is often shown in very
small letters on the CD cover itself where
it may, for example, say “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PROTECTED”, “THIS CD
CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A PC/MAC”, or
it may be identified through the use of
symbols, such as, for example:
❍ The CD player is capable of reading most
compression systems currently in use
(e.g.: LAME, BLADE, XING, FRAUNHOFER) but, following the development
of these systems, the reading of all compression formats is not guaranteed.
SOUND SYSTEM
CD
Dirt, scratches or any distortions on CDs
could cause problems and poor sound quality during playback. Follow these tips for optimum playback conditions:
❍ only use CDs with the following brand;
249
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BOSE HI-FI SYSTEM LEVEL
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Maximum power: 4x30W
BASIC SYSTEM LEVEL
❍ HI-FI level audio
❍ Standard level audio
Front speakers
Front speakers
– 2 tweeters (38 mm ø);
– 2 mid-woofer speakers (165 mm
– 2 tweeters (38 mm
ø).
SOUND SYSTEM
Rear speakers
– 2 full-range speakers (165 mm ø).
❍ Mid-range radio
(dual tuner)
– 2 mid-woofer speakers (165 mm
ø).
– 1 mid-tweeter (Centerfill) speaker
fitted in the dashboard.
Rear speakers
– 2 tweeters (38 mm
ø);
– 2 mid-woofer speakers (165 mm
MID-RANGE SYSTEM
❍ Mid-range audio
– 1 amplifier (8 channels);
Front speakers
– 2 tweeters (38 mm ø);
– 2 mid-woofer speakers (165 mm
– 1 bass box.
ø).
Rear speakers
– 2 tweeters (38 mm ø);
– 2 mid-woofer speakers (165 mm
ø).
❍ High-end radio
(dual tuner and double aerial)
250
ø);
❍ High-end radio
(dual tuner and double aerial)
ø),
The BOSE HI-FI audio system has been carefully designed to provide the best acoustic
performance and reproduce sound like a live
concert in all areas of the passenger compartment.
The system faithfully reproduces crystalline
high tones and provides full and rich bass
tones that make the loudness function superfluous. The complete range of sound is
reproduced throughout the entire passenger
compartment so that the occupants are enveloped with the feeling of space experienced when listening to live music.
The components used have been patented
and make use of the most sophisticated
technology whilst at the same time being
easy to use by even the most inexperienced
people.
SOUND SYSTEM
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
fig. 1
A0K0031m
251
BUTTON
(fig. 1)
g
A (fig. 1)
FMAS
AM
MEDIA
SOUND SYSTEM
MUTE
252
O
MENU
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
MODE
Switching on
Short button press
Switching off
Volume adjustment
Selection of radio source FM1, FM2, FM Autostore
Short button press
Left/right rotation of left knob
Short cyclical button press
Selection of radio source MW
Short cyclical button press
Selection of CD/Media Player source (only with Blue&Me™)/
AUX (only with Blue&Me™) (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Short cyclical button press
Volume on/off (MUTE/PAUSE)
Short button press
Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE),
left/right balance (BALANCE), front/rear balance (FADER)
Menu activation: short button press
Selection of type of adjustment: pressing buttons or
Adjustment of values: pressing buttons or
Advanced functions adjustment
Menu activation: short button press
Selection of type of adjustment: pressing buttons or
Adjustment of values: pressing buttons or
RADIO FUNCTIONS
MODE
Radio station search:
• Automatic search
• Manual search
Automatic search: press buttons or
(hold down for fast forward)
Manual search: press buttons or
(hold down for fast forward)
123456
Storing current radio station
Hold down the respective buttons for preset
memories 1 to 6
Stored station recall
Briefly press the respective buttons for preset
memories 1 to 6
BUTTON
(fig. 1)
˚
CD FUNCTIONS
MODE
Eject CD
Short button press
Play previous/next track
Short press buttons or
CD track fast forward/rewind
Hold down buttons or
Play previous/next folder (for CD-MP3)
Short press buttons or
BUTTON
(fig. 1)
Media Player FUNCTIONS
(only with Blue&Me™)
Selecting previous/next folder/artist/genre/album
depending on selected selection mode
Play previous/next track
SOUND SYSTEM
BUTTON
(fig. 1)
MODE
Short button press
Short button press
253
SOUND SYSTEM
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (for versions/markets, where provided) fig. 2
254
fig. 2
A0K0118m
FUNCTION
MODE
&
AudioMute on/off (Radio mode)
or Pause function: MP3 or Media Player mode (only with Blue&Me™)
Short button press
+
Volume up
Button press
−
Volume down
Button press
SRC
Selection of Radio frequency range (FM1, FM2, FMT, FMA, MW) or
listening sources: Radio, MP3 or Media Player (only with Blue&Me™)/
AUX (only with Blue&Me™) (for versions/markets, where provided)
Button press
䊱
Radio: recall programmed stations (from 1 to 6)
CD/CD MP3: selection of next track
Button press
䊲
Radio: recall programmed stations (from 1 to 6)
CD/CD MP3: selection of previous track
Button press
SOUND SYSTEM
BUTTON
(fig. 2)
255
SOUND SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
The radio has the following functions:
256
Tuner section
❍ PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW frequency bands;
❍ RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (Traffic Information) - TP (Traffic Programs) EON (Enhanced Other Network) - REG
(Regional Programs) functions;
❍ AF: alternative frequency search selection in RDS mode;
❍ emergency alarm setup;
❍ automatic/manual station tuning;
❍ FM Multipath detector;
❍ manual storing of 30 stations: 18 on
FM band (6 on FM1, 6 on FM2, 6 on
FMT), 12 on MW band (6 on MW1,
6 on MW2);
❍ automatic storage (AUTOSTORE function) of 6 stations on the dedicated FM
band;
❍ SPEED VOLUME function (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system): speeddependent automatic volume adjustment;
❍ automatic Stereo/Mono selection.
CD section
❍ Direct selection of the disc;
❍ Select track (forward/backward);
❍ Track fast advance (forward/backward);
❍ CD Display function: display of disc
name/time elapsed since the start of
the track;
❍ Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW playback.
Audio section
❍ Mute/Pause function;
❍ Soft Mute function;
❍ Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system);
❍ 7 band graphic equalizer (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);
❍ Separate adjustment of treble/bass
tones;
❍ Right/left channel balance.
Multimedia CDs include data
tracks in addition to the audio tracks. Playing this type of CD
could cause hissing at a volume that
could jeopardise road safety as well
as damage the output stages and the
speakers.
Media Player section
(only with Blue&Me™)
See the description in the Blue&Me™ Supplement for the operation of the Media
Player.
MP3 CD section
❍ MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG);
❍ Select folder (previous/next);
❍ Select track (forward/backward);
❍ Track fast advance (forward/backward);
❍ MP3 Display function: display of name
of folder, ID3-TAG information, time
elapsed since the start of the track, file
name);
❍ Audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW playback.
AUX section
(only with Blue&Me™)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
❍ AUX source selection;
❍ AUX Offset function: alignment of the
portable device volume to the one of the
other sources;
❍ Portable player reading.
FUNCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
SWITCHING OFF THE
SOUND SYSTEM
Briefly press the button g.
SELECTING THE
RADIO FUNCTIONS
By pressing the FMAS button quickly and repeatedly, the following audio sources can be
selected cyclically:
❍ TUNER (“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMA”);
By pressing the AM button quickly and repeatedly, the following audio sources can be
selected cyclically:
❍ TUNER (“MW1”, “MW2”).
SELECTING CD FUNCTION
Press the MEDIA button briefly to select the
CD function.
AUDIO SOURCE MEMORY
FUNCTION
If another function (e.g. the radio) is selected whilst listening to a CD, playing is interrupted and is resumed from the same point
when returning to the CD source.
If another function is selected whilst listening
to the radio, the last station selected is tuned
into when returning to the Radio source.
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the volume, turn the left knob A
(fig. 1).
If the volume level is changed during the
transmission of traffic news, the new setting
will only be maintained until the update is
finished.
SOUND SYSTEM
SWITCHING ON THE
SOUND SYSTEM
The car radio is switched on by briefly pressing button g.
When the car radio is turned on, the volume
is limited to value 20 if it was set to a higher value when previously used or to value 5
if it was previously set to value 0 or to
Mute/Pause. The previously set value is
maintained in all other cases.
When the radio is turned on with the key
extracted from the ignition, it switches off
automatically after about 20 minutes. After
it turns off automatically, it can be switched
on again for an additional 20 minutes by
pressing button g.
257
SOUND SYSTEM
258
MUTE/PAUSE FUNCTION
(zeroing the volume)
Press the MUTE button briefly to activate the
Mute function. The volume will gradually decrease and the words “RADIO Mute” will appear on the display (in radio mode) or
“PAUSE” (in CD mode).
Press the MUTE button again to deactivate
the Mute function. The volume will gradually increase until it reaches the level set previously.
When the volume is changed using the dedicated controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the volume is adjusted to the new
level selected.
With the Mute function activated, it will be
ignored when there is an incoming traffic alert
(if the TA function is activated), or if an emergency alarm is received. The function will be
reactivated when the alert is over.
AUDIO ADJUSTMENTS
The functions in the audio menu differ according to the activated source: AM/FM/
CD/Media Player (only with Blue&Me™)/
AUX (only with Blue&Me™) (for versions/markets, where provided).
Press the O button briefly to change the
Audio functions. After the O button is first
pressed, the display will show the bass level value for the source activated at that time
(e.g. in FM mode the display will show “FM
Bass + 2”).
To scroll through the Menu functions use buttons or . To change the setting of the
selected function, use buttons or .
The current status of the function selected
will be shown on the display.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
❍ BASS (bass adjustment);
❍ TREBLE (treble adjustment);
❍ BALANCE (right/left balance adjustment);
❍ FADER (front/rear balance adjustment);
❍ LOUDNESS (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system) (activation/deactivation of LOUDNESS function);
❍ EQUALIZER (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system) (activation and selection of equalizer factory settings);
❍ USER EQUALISER (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI Bose) (personalised
equalizer settings).
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
Proceed as follows:
❍ Use buttons or to set the “Balance” in the AUDIO menu;
❍ press button to increase the sound
from the right speakers or to increase
the sound from the left speakers.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels
will change progressively. By pressing them
for longer, the levels will change quickly.
Select the “ 0 ” value to set the right
and left audio outputs at the same value.
FADER ADJUSTMENT
Proceed as follows:
❍ Use buttons or to set the “Fader balance” in the AUDIO menu;
❍ press button to increase the sound
coming from the rear speakers or to
increase the sound coming from the
front speakers.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels
will change progressively. By pressing them
for longer, the levels will change quickly.
Select the “ 0 ” value to set the front
and rear audio outputs at the same value.
SOUND SYSTEM
TONE ADJUSTMENT
(bass/treble)
Proceed as follows:
❍ Use buttons or to set the “Bass”
or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu;
❍ press buttons or to increase/
decrease the bass or treble settings.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels
will change progressively. By pressing them
for longer, the levels will change quickly.
259
SOUND SYSTEM
LOUDNESS FUNCTION
(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
The Loudness function improves the volume
of the sound whilst listening at low volumes,
increasing the bass and treble.
To activate/deactivate the function, select
the Loudness setting on the AUDIO menu using the or buttons. The function status (on or off) is shown on the display for
a few seconds by the words Loudness On or
Loudness Off.
260
EQ function
(activation/deactivation of
equalizer)
(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
The built-in equalizer can be activated/
deactivated. When the equalizer function
is off, the audio settings can only be
changed by adjusting the bass and treble
settings, whereas when the function is on,
the acoustic curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select the “EQ OFF”
function using buttons or .
To activate the equalizer, select one of the
following adjustments using buttons or
:
❍ “FM/AM/CD...EQ User” (adjustment
of the 7 equalizer bands that can be
changed by the user);
❍ “Classic” (predefined equalizer setting
for optimum playback of classical music);
❍ “Rock” (predefined equalizer setting for
optimum playback of rock and pop music);
❍ “Jazz” (predefined equalizer setting for
optimum playback of jazz music).
When one of the equalizer adjustments is
activated the letters “EQ” light up.
MENU
MENU button functions
Press the MENU button briefly to activate
the Menu function. The display will show the
first menu item that can be adjusted (AF)
(“AF Switching On” on the display).
To scroll through the Menu functions use buttons or . To change the setting of the
selected function, use buttons or .
The current status of the function selected
will be shown on the display.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
❍ AF SWITCHING (ON/OFF);
❍ TRAFFIC INFORMATION (ON/OFF);
❍ REGIONAL MODE regional programmes
(ON/OFF);
❍ MP3 DISPLAY (CD MP3 display setting);
❍ SPEED VOLUME (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system) (speed-dependent
automatic volume adjustment);
❍ RADIO ON VOLUME (radio volume maximum limit activation/deactivacion);
❍ SPEECH VOLUME (telephone volume adjustment);
❍ AUX OFFSET (alignment of the portable
device volume to the one of the other
sources);
❍ RADIO OFF (switching off mode);
❍ SYSTEM RESET.
Press the MENU button again to exit the
Menu function.
IMPORTANT AF SWITCHING, TRAFFIC INFORMATION and REGIONAL MODE adjustments
are only possible in FM mode.
SOUND SYSTEM
*USER EQ SETTINGS function
(equalizer settings only if the
USER settings function has
been selected)
(excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)
To set a customised equalizer adjustment,
set either the or button to USER and
press the MENU button.
A graph with 7 bars will appear on the display, where each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to adjust using the or
; buttons; the bar selected will start to
flash and can be adjusted using the or
buttons.
Press the O button again to store the setting. The display will show the source activated at the time followed by the word
USER. If the mode is, for example, FM, then
the display will show “FM EQ User”.
261
SOUND SYSTEM
262
AF SWITCHING function
(alternative frequency
search)
The radio can operate in two different modes
in the RDS system:
❍ “AF Switching On”: search for alternative frequencies activated (the letters
“AF” appear on the display);
❍ “AF Switching Off”: search for alternative frequencies not activated.
Proceed as follows to switch the function
on/off:
❍ press the MENU button and select “AF
Switching On”;
❍ press the / buttons to switch the
function on/off.
With the function activated, the radio automatically tunes into the station with the
strongest signal broadcasting the same program. In this way when driving you can continue listening to the same station without
having to change the frequency when you
change areas.
Obviously, it must be possible to receive the
station that you are listening to in the area
you are driving through.
If the AF function is activated, “AF” will light
up in the display.
If the AF function has been activated and
the radio is no longer capable of receiving
the station tuned into, the radio will activate
the automatic search during which the display will show “FM Search” (only for the
high end radio).
With the AF function deactivated, the remaining RDS functions such as the display
of the name of the radio station continue to
remain activated.
The AF function can only be activated on FM
bands.
With the TA function it is possible to:
❍ search only for RDS stations that transmit on the FM band, which are enabled
to transmit traffic information;
❍ receive traffic information even if the CD
player is on;
❍ receive traffic information at a minimum
preset volume even with the radio volume off.
IMPORTANT In some countries there are radio stations that do not broadcast traffic information even with the TP function activated (“TP” in the display).
If the radio is working on the AM band,
when the TA function is activated it will
switch to the last station tuned into on the
FM1 band.
The volume at which the traffic news is transmitted depends on the listening volume:
❍ listening volume below 5: traffic news
volume 5 (fixed value);
❍ listening volume above 5: traffic news
volume equal to listening volume +1.
If the volume is changed during a traffic update, the level will not be shown on the display; the new level will only be maintained
during the update.
The display will show the words TRAFFIC INFORMATION whilst a traffic update is being
received.
The TA function can be interrupted by pressing any button on the car radio.
SOUND SYSTEM
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
function (traffic information)
Some stations on the FM band (FM1, FM2
and FMA) can transmit information about
traffic conditions. In this case the letters “TA”
will appear on the display.
Proceed as follows to switch the TA function
on/off:
❍ briefly press the MENU button and select “Traffic Info”;
❍ press buttons / to switch the
function on/off.
If the TA function is activated, “TA” will light
up on the display.
IMPORTANT If the TA function is activated
with an audio source other than Tuner (Radio) (CD, MP3, Telephone or Mute/Pause),
the radio can carry out an automatic search
and therefore it is possible, when reactivating the Tuner (Radio) source, that the frequency tuned into will be different from the
one set previously.
263
SOUND SYSTEM
264
REGIONAL MODE function
(reception of regional
broadcasts)
Some national broadcasters will transmit regional programmes at certain times of the
day (that vary from region to region). This
function makes it possible to tune into local (regional) broadcasters automatically
(see EON function paragraph).
If you want the radio to automatically tune
into the regional stations being broadcast on
the network selected, the function must be
activated.
To turn the function on/off, use buttons
or .
The current status of the function will appear
on the display:
❍ “Regional On”: function activated;
❍ “Regional Off”: function deactivated.
If the function is deactivated and you have
tuned into a regional station working in a
given area and you enter a different area,
then the regional station received in the new
area will be broadcast.
WARNING If the AF and REG functions are
on at the same time, once a border between
two regions is crossed, the radio may not
switch correctly to a valid alternative frequency.
MP3 DISPLAY FUNCTION
(display of MP3 Compact Disc
information)
This function makes it possible to select the
information shown by the display when listening to a CD containing MP3 tracks.
The function can only be selected if a CD
MP3 is inserted: in this case “MP3 Display”
will appear on the display.
To change the function, use buttons or
.
The following settings are available:
❍ “Title” (track title, if the ID3-TAG is available);
❍ “Author” (track author, if the ID3-TAG is
available);
❍ “Album” (track album, if the ID3-TAG is
available);
❍ “Folder” (folder name);
❍ “File” (MP3 file name).
RADIO ON VOLUME function
(radio volume maximum limit
activation/deactivation)
This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on.
The display shows the function status:
❍ “Radio on vol – Limit on”: when the
radio is switched on the volume level
will be:
– if the volume level is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the radio will come on at the maximum volume;
– if the volume level is between the
minimum and maximum values, the
radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off;
– if the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value, the radio
will come on at the minimum volume.
❍ “Radio on vol – Limit off”: the radio will
come on at the volume level it was at
before switching off. The volume may
be between 0 and 40.
To change the setting use buttons / .
NOTES
❍ Using the MENU it is only possible to adjust the activation/deactivation of the
function and not the minimum or maximum volume setting.
❍ If the “TA” or “TEL” functions or an outside audio source are activated when the
radio is turned on, the radio will come
on at the volume set for these sources.
When the outside audio source is deactivated, the volume can be adjusted between the minimum and maximum levels.
❍ If the battery charge is low, it will not
be possible to adjust the volume between the minimum and maximum
levels.
SOUND SYSTEM
SPEED VOLUME function
(variation of volume
dependent on speed)
(excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)
This function allows the volume level to be
adjusted automatically depending on the
speed of the vehicle, increasing it as the
speed increases to maintain the same balance with the noise level inside the passenger compartment. To turn the function
on/off, press buttons / . The words
Speed volume should appear on the display
followed by the current status of the function:
❍ Off: function deactivated
❍ Low: function activated
(low setting)
❍ High: function activated
(high setting).
265
SOUND SYSTEM
SPEECH VOLUME function
(telephone volume
adjustment)
This function makes it possible to adjust (setting from 1 to 40), by turning the left knob
A-fig. 1 or pressing buttons / or exclude (OFF setting) the volume of the Telephone and Blue&Me™ (except the Media
Player function).
The display shows the current function status:
❍ “Speech Off”: function deactivated.
❍ “Speech Volume 23”: function activated with volume set to 23.
266
AUX OFFSET function
(alignment of the portable
device volume to the one of
the other sources)
This function enables to align the volume
of the AUX source, depending on its own
portable player, to the one of the other
sources. To activate the function, press the
MENU button and then select “AUX offset”.
Press the buttons or to decrease or increase the volume value (set from −6 to
+6).
RADIO OFF function
(on and off mode)
This function is used to select the mode for
switching off the radio between two different procedures. To turn the function on use
buttons or .
The selected mode will appear on the display:
❍ “00 MIN”: the radio turns off automatically in connection with the ignition key;
the radio turns off automatically as soon
as the key is turned to the STOP position;
❍ “20 MIN”: the radio turns off independently from the ignition key; the radio
remains on for a maximum period of 20
minutes after the key has been turned
to the STOP position.
TELEPHONE SETUP
If a hands-free kit is installed on the car,
when there is an incoming phone call the car
radio audio will be connected to the telephone output. The telephone volume is always fixed, but it can be adjusted during a
conversation using the left knob A (fig.1).
The fixed telephone audio volume can be adjusted using the “SPEECH VOLUME” function in the Menu. The word PHONE will appear on the display during the deactivation
of the audio for the phone call.
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION
The radio is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of information between the car radio and the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) on
the vehicle.
This system guarantees maximum security
and avoids the password having to be entered every time after the radio power supply is disconnected.
If the outcome of the check is positive, the
radio will start to work, whilst if the codes
compared are not the same or if the electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the equipment will notify the user
of the need to enter the password following
the procedure in the paragraph below.
SOUND SYSTEM
SYSTEM RESET function
This function is used to restore all settings
to their preset factory values. The options
are:
❍ NO: no restore operation;
❍ YES: the default parameters are restored. The display will show “Resetting” during this operation. At the end
of the operation, the source does not
change and the previous situation will
be displayed.
267
SOUND SYSTEM
268
Entering the code
When the radio is switched on, if the password is requested, the display will show “Radio code” for about 2 seconds followed by
four dashes “- - - -”.
The code is made up of four numbers from
1 to 6, each corresponding to one of the
dashes.
To enter the first number, press the button
corresponding to the preset stations (from
1 to 6). Enter the other code numbers in the
same way.
If the four digits are not entered within 20
seconds, the display will show “Enter code
- - - -”. If this occurs, it is not considered an
incorrect code entry.
After the fourth number is entered (within
20 seconds), the car radio will start to function.
If an incorrect code is entered, the radio will
emit a sound and the display will show “Radio blocked/wait” to notify the user of the
need to enter the correct code.
Each time the user enters an incorrect code,
the waiting time will gradually increase (1
min, 2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30
min,1h, 2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) up to a maximum of 24 hours. The waiting time will be
shown on the display by “Radio blocked/
wait”. After the message disappears, the
code entering procedure may be started
again.
Code Card
This document certifies ownership of the car
radio. The Code Card contains the model of
the radio, the serial number and the password.
IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card somewhere
safe so that the authorities can be supplied
with the relevant information if the radio is
stolen.
INTRODUCTION
When the radio is turned on the last function selected before it was switched off is
activated: Radio, CD, CD MP3, Media Player (only with Blue&Me™) or AUX (only
with Blue&Me™) (for versions/markets,
where provided).
To select the Radio function whilst listening
to another audio source, press the FMAS or
AM buttons briefly, depending on the desired
band.
Once the Radio mode has been activated,
the display will show the name (RDS stations only) and the frequency of the selected radio station, the frequency band selected (e.g. FM1) and the preselect button number (e.g. P1).
FREQUENCY BAND
SELECTION
With the Radio mode activated, press the FMAS
or AM button briefly and repeatedly to select
the desired reception band.
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected cyclically:
❍ Pressing the FMAS button: “FM1”,
“FM2” or “FMA”;
❍ Pressing the AM button: “MW1” and
“MW2”.
Each band is highlighted by the name in the
display. The last station selected on the respective frequency band will be tuned into.
The FM band is divided into sections: FM1,
FM1 or “FMA”; the FMA reception band is
reserved for broadcasters stored automatically using the AutoSTore function.
PRESET BUTTONS
The buttons numbered from 1 to 6 can used
to set the following presettings:
❍ 18 on the FM band FM (6 on FM1, 6
on FM2, 6 on FMT or “FMA” (on some
versions);
❍ 12 on the MW band (6 on MW1, 6 on
MW2).
To listen to a preset station, select the desired
frequency band and then briefly press the corresponding preset button (from 1 to 6).
By pressing the preset button for more than
2 seconds, the station tuned into will be
stored. The storing phase is confirmed by an
acoustic signal.
SOUND SYSTEM
R A D I O ( Tu n e r )
STORING THE LAST STATION
LISTENED TO
The radio automatically stores the last station that was selected for each reception
band, which is then tuned into when the
radio is turned on or when the reception
band is changed.
269
SOUND SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC TUNING
Briefly press buttons or to start the
automatic tuning search for the next station
that can be received in the selected direction.
If the or buttons are pressed down for
longer, the fast search starts. When the button is released, the tuning will stop at the
next station that can be received.
If the TA function (traffic information) is on,
the tuner will only search for stations that
broadcast traffic updates.
270
MANUAL TUNING
This allows a manual search for stations on
the preselected band.
Select the desired frequency band and then
press the or button briefly and repeatedly to start to the search in the desired direction. If the or buttons are pressed
for longer, the fast search will start and then
stop when the button is released.
AUTOSTORE FUNCTION
To activate the AutoSTore function, keep the
FMAS button pressed until the acoustic confirmation signal. With this function, the radio automatically stores the 6 stations with
the strongest signal in a decreasing order on
the FMA frequency band.
During the automatic storing process,
“Autostore” will appear flashing on the display.
To interrupt the Autostore function, press the
FMAS button again: the radio will again tune
into the station listened to before the activation of the function.
When the AutoSTore function is over, the radio automatically tunes into the first preselected station on the FMA band on the presetting 1 side.
The stations that have a strong signal at that
moment are then automatically stored in the
preselected band in the buttons numbered
1 to 6.
When the AutoSTore function is activated
within the MW band, the FMA band is automatically selected and the function is performed.
IMPORTANT Sometimes the AutoSTore function does not manage to find 6 stations with
a strong signal. In this case, the strongest
stations will be duplicated in the free preset buttons.
IMPORTANT When the AutoSTore function is
activated, the stations that were previously
stored on the FMA band are deleted.
EON FUNCTION
(Enhanced Other Network)
In some countries, there are circuits that
group multiple broadcasters that transmit
traffic information together. In this case, the
programme on the station that is being listened to will be temporarily interrupted to:
❍ receive traffic information (only with the
TA function on);
❍ listen to regional transmissions each time
they are transmitted by one of the broadcasters in the same circuit.
STEREOPHONIC
BROADCASTERS
If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo
to Mono.
SOUND SYSTEM
EMERGENCY ALARM
RECEPTION
The radio can receive emergency alerts in RDS
mode in exceptional circumstances where
dangerous situations are threatened (earthquakes, floods, etc.) if these are being transmitted by the broadcaster tuned into.
This function is activated automatically and
cannot be turned off.
The word Alarm will be shown in the display
during the transmission of an emergency announcement. The volume of the radio will
change during this announcement in the
same way as during a traffic bulletin.
271
C D P L AY E R
SOUND SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the variants regarding the operation of the CD player: as far
as the operation of the radio is concerned,
refer to the description in the “Functions and
Adjustments” chapter.
272
SELECTING THE CD PLAYER
To activate the CD player built-into the equipment, proceed as follows:
❍ load a CD with the device switched on:
the first track will start to play;
or
❍ if a CD has already been loaded, turn on
the car radio and then briefly press the
CD button to select the “CD” operating
mode: the last track listened to will start
to play.
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure
optimum playback. If CD-R/RWs are used,
we recommend using good quality media
mastered at the slowest speed possible.
LOADING/EJECTING A CD
To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot
to activate the motorised loading system,
which will position it correctly.
The CD can be loaded with the radio
switched off and the ignition key in the MAR
position: in this case the radio will remain
off. When the car radio is turned on, the last
source listened to prior to switching off will
be activated.
When a CD is loaded the display will show
“CD-IN” and the words “CD Reading”. They
will remain displayed for the entire time required for the car radio to read the CD tracks.
When this time has elapsed the radio will
automatically start to play the first track.
Press the ˚ button with the car adio on to
activate the motorised ejection of the CD.
After ejection, the last audio source listened
to before playing the CD will be heard.
If the CD is not removed from the car radio, it will automatically be reloaded about
20 seconds later and the Tuner mode will
be tuned into (Radio).
The CD cannot be ejected if the car radio is
off.
If the ejected CD is loaded without having
removed it completely from the slot, the
radio will not switch to the CD source.
DISPLAY INFORMATION
When the CD player is working, the display
will show the following information:
❍ “CD Track 5”: indicating the number of
the CD track;
❍ “03:42”: indicating the time elapsed
since the start of the track (if the relevant Menu function is activated).
TRACK SELECTION
(forward/back)
Briefly press the button to play the previous CD track and the button to play the
next track. The tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last
track and vice versa.
If the track has been playing for more than
3 seconds, pressing will cause the track
to start again from the beginning. In this
case, if you want to play the previous track,
press the button twice consecutively.
TRACK FAST FORWARD/
REWIND
Keep the button pressed down to fast forward the selected track and keep the button pressed down to fast rewind the track.
The fast forward/rewind will stop once the
button is released.
PAUSE FUNCTION
To pause the CD player, press the MUTE button. The words “CD Pause” will appear on
the display.
To resume listening to the track, press the
MUTE button again.
If another audio source is selected, the pause
function is turned off.
SOUND SYSTEM
Possible error messages
If the CD loaded cannot be read (e.g. a CD
ROM has been inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way round or there is reading error) the display will show the words
“CD Disc error”.
The CD will then be ejected and the audio
source activated prior to the CD mode selection will be heard.
With an external audio source activated (TA,
ALARM or Phone), the CD that cannot be
read will be not be ejected until these functions have ended. At the end, with the CD
mode activated, the display will show the
words “CD Disc error” for a few seconds and
then the CD will be ejected.
273
M P 3 C D P L AY E R
SOUND SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the variants regarding the operation of the MP3 CD player: as
far as the operation of the radio is concerned, refer to the description in the “Functions and Adjustments” and “CD player”
chapters.
NOTE MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
274
MP3 MODE
In addition to playing normal audio CDs, the
car radio is also capable of playing CD-ROMs
on which MP3 format compressed audio files
are recorded. The radio functions as described in the “CD Player” chapter when an
ordinary audio CD is inserted.
The use of good quality media mastered at
the slowest possible speeds is recommended for optimum quality.
The files on the MP3 CD are in folders, with
sequential lists of all the folders containing
MP3 tracks (folders and sub-folders are all displayed on the same level) and folders that do
not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected.
The operating conditions and specifications
for playing MP3 files are as follows:
❍ the CD-ROMs used must be mastered in
compliance with the ISO9660 Standard;
❍ the music files must have an “.mp3”
extension: files with a different extension cannot be played;
❍ the following sampling frequencies can
be played: 44.1 kHz, stereo (96 to 320
kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz, mono or stereo
(32 to 80 kbit/s);
❍ tracks with variable bit-rates can also be
played.
IMPORTANT The names of tracks must not
contain the following characters: spaces, ‘
(apostrophes), (and) (open and close brackets). When an MP3 CD is being burned
make sure that the file names do not contain these characters; otherwise, the car radio will not be able to play those tracks.
IMPORTANT When the function is activated
the radio may take a few seconds to start
playback. Whilst checking the disc the display will show “CD READING”; if no MP3
files are detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session from the point where
it was interrupted.
DISPLAY INFORMATION
ID3-tag information display
In addition to the information relating to the
time elapsed, the name of the folder and the
name of the file, the car radio is also capable of display ID3-TAG information relating
to the Track title, Artist and Author.
The name of the MP3 folder shown on the
display corresponds to the name with which
the folder was stored on the CD, followed
by an asterisk.
Example of a complete MP3 folder name:
BEST OF *.
If you wish to display ID3-TAG information
(Title, Artist, Album) and this information
has not been recorded for the track played,
the information will be replaced by information relating to the name of the file.
SELECT NEXT/PREVIOUS
FOLDER
Press to select the next folder or to
select the previous folder. The display will
show the number and the name of the folder (e.g. “DIR 2 XXXXXX”).
XXXXXX: name of the folder (the display
will only show the first 12 characters).
The folders are selected cyclically: the first
folder is selected after the last folder and
vice versa.
If no other folder/track is selected during
the next 2 seconds, the first track contained
in the new folder will be played.
If the last track on the folder currently selected is being played, the next folder will
be played.
SOUND SYSTEM
SELECTING MP3 SESSIONS ON
HYBRID DISCS
If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files,
the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to move to the
MP3 session whilst playing by keeping the
MEDIA button pressed for more than 2 seconds.
STRUCTURE OF THE FOLDERS
The car radio with MP3 player:
❍ only recognises those folders that effectively contain MP3 format files
❍ if the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in “sub-folders”, their structure is
compressed to a single level structure
where the “sub-folders” are at the level
of the main folders.
275
AUX (only with Blue&Me™)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SOUND SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the variants regarding the operation of the AUX source: as far
as the operation of the radio is concerned,
refer to the description in the “Functions and
Adjustments” chapter.
276
AUX MODE
To activate the AUX source, press the MEDIA
button or the SRC steering wheel control several times till the corresponding source is displayed.
IMPORTANT NOTES
The functions of the device connected with
the AUX socket are directly managed by the
device itself; it is not possible to change
track/folder/playlist with radio or steering
wheel controls.
Do not leave the cable of your portable player connected with the AUX socket after the
disconnection, to avoid possible hisses from
the speakers.
NOTE The AUX socket is not incorporated
in the radio. For its position, refer to the
Blue&Me™ Supplement and its Quick
Guide.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CD PLAYER
MP3 FILE READING
GENERAL
The CD does not play
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try and use another CD.
Skips tracks whilst playing
MP3 files
The CD is scratched or dirty. Clean the CD,
referring to the contents of the “CD” paragraph in the “Introduction” chapter.
Source cannot be selected
Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or
MP3 CD to be played.
The CD cannot be loaded
A CD is already loaded. Press ˚ and remove
the CD.
The duration of the MP3
tracks is not correctly
displayed
In some cases (due to the recording mode)
the duration of the MP3 tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
SOUND SYSTEM
Sound volume low
The Fader function should be adjusted to “F”
(front) values to prevent the reduction of radio output power and the cancelling of the
volume if the Fader level adjustment is R+9.
277
ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE CAR AT THE END
OF ITS LIFE
For years, Alfa Romeo has pursued a global commitment to protect and respect the environment by continually improving its
production processes and developing increasingly eco-compatible products. To ensure its customers the best possible service
in compliance with environment standards and in response to obligations arising out of European Directive 2000/53/EC on
end of life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its customers the chance to hand back their vehicles (*) at the end of their life cycle
at no additional cost.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value. In all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, only
vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 were collected free of charge, while since 2007 collection has been free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.
To hand back your car at the end of its life without additional cost, you may contact one of our dealers or one of the collection and demolition centres authorised by Alfa Romeo. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service
for the collection, treatment and recycling of unused vehicles with respect to the environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an Alfa Romeo Authorized Services or
by calling the freephone number 00800 2532 0000 or on the Alfa Romeo website.
(*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t
Oil change? The experts recommend Selenia
The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia.
This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advanced
international specifications. Its superior technical characteristics
allow Selenia to guarantee the highest performance
and protection of your engine.
The Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA SPORT
Fully synthetic lubricant capable of meeting the needs of
high performance engines.
Studied to protect the engine also in high thermal stress
conditions, it prevents deposits on the turbine to achieve
the utmost performance in total safety.
SELENIA StAR PURE ENERGY
Synthetic lubricant designed for petrol engines that need
products with a low ash content. It maximises the
characteristics of engines with high specific power,
protects the parts mostly subjected to stress and helps
to keep modern catalysts clean.
SELENIA WR PURE ENERGY
Fully synthetic lubricant that can meet the requirements of
the latest diesel engines.
Low ash content to protect the particulate filter from the
residual products of combustion. High Fuel Economy
System that allows considerable fuel saving.
It reduces the danger of dirtying the turbine to ensure the
protection of increasingly high performance diesel
engines
SELENIA RACING
This lubricant has been developed as a result of Selenia’s
extensive experience in track and rally competitions,
it maximises engine performance in all kinds of
competition use.
The range also includes K Pure Energy, Selenia Digitech,
Selenia Multipower, Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K AR.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web
site www.selenia.com
DASHBOARD
3
2
4
5
AC
19.5 c
A
20
19 18 17 16
6
4
7
8
9
2
1
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE VERSIONS
1
AUT O
22.0
C
MONO
15 14 13
12
11
10
A0K0225m
1. Fixed vent for sending air to side windows - 2. Adjustable air vent - 3. Passenger front air bag - 4. Upper adjustable vents - 5. Hazard warning
lights - 6. Radio navigator display (for versions/markets, where provided) - 7. External light control stalk - 8. Instrument panel - 9. Windscreen
wiper/rear window wiper/trip computer stalk - 10. Headlight alignment corrector (for versions/markets, where provided) and Set Up Menu
access buttons - 11. Ignition device - 12. Driver's front air bag - 13. Cruise Control stalk (for versions/markets, where provided) - 14. Control
buttons: fog lights/rear fog light, Start&Stop system (for versions/markets, where provided), door locking/unlocking, AFS light on/off (for
versions/markets, where provided) - 15. “Alfa DNA” system - 16. Gear lever - 17. Heating/ventilation/air conditioning controls - 18. Sound system (for versions/markets, where provided) - 19. Central adjustable air vents - 20. Glove compartment.
281
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE VERSIONS
CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS
A0K0004m
VERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
A
B
C
D
E
Speedometer
Multifunction display
Rev counter
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light
Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
m c Warning lights present on diesel versions only. On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000 rpm
IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to versions.
282
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE VERSIONS
A0K0003m
VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
A
B
C
D
E
Speedometer
Reconfigurable multifunction display
Rev counter
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light
Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
m c Warning lights present on diesel versions only. On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000 rpm
IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to versions.
283
CHANGING A FUSE
FUSEBOX ON DASHBOARD
Insert a hand in the seat A-fig. 1 and lower the flap B to access the fuses. The fuses are located in the fusebox shown in fig. 2.
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE VERSIONS
NOTE For fuse protected devices refer to the description of “In an emergency” chapter.
284
fig. 1
A0K0246m
fig. 2
A0K0245m
CONTENTS
ABS ..................................... 109 Automatic dual zone
AFS (adaptive lights) ............... 86
Air bags
– Front air bags .................... 146
– Front passenger side airbag
deactivation ....................... 147
– Side air bags ..................... 148
Air filter/pollen filter/diesel filter 214
Air vents ..........................
57-58
Alarm..................................... 47
“Alfa DNA” system................... 113
Alfa Romeo CODE system.......... 40
AQS (Air Quality System function) 70
Arm rest
climate system ...................... 65
Battery
Brakes
– Brake Assist ...................... 112
– handbrake ......................... 153
– replacement ....................... 214
– specifications ..................... 231
– tips for extending battery life 214
Bulbs (replacement) ................ 174
Bodywork
– bodywork codes.................. 227
– bulb types ................... 175-176
– general information ............ 174
Bodywork versions ................... 227
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Capacities .............................. 127 IN AN
Bonnet .................................. 106
– capacities table ............ 240-241
Boot ..................................... 101
– fuel tank cap ..................... 128
– boot volume ...................... 236
Car radio set-up ...................... 122
– expanding the boot ............ 103
Car radio........................... 247-280
– securing your load .............. 105
Carrying children safely ............ 138
Boot light
– “Isofix” child seat set-up ..... 143
– bulb replacement ................ 183
– child seats ......................... 139
– rear .................................. 89
Brake Assist system.................. 112
CBC system ............................ 112
Brake lights
Ceiling lights
ASR system ............................ 111
SAFETY
– cleaning ........................... 221
– front ................................. 88
Ashtray ................................. 91
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
– bulb replacement ................ 179
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
– boot light .......................... 84
285
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
– seats................................. 223
– front ceiling light ................ 81
– windows............................ 222
– bulb replacement ................ 178
– glove compartment light ...... 84 Climate control system ............. 57
– puddle lights ..................... 84
– air vents ..................... 57-58
Changing a wheel ................... 162
Climatic comfort ..................... 59
Changing bulbs
Clutch .................................... 230
– exterior lights .................... 177
CO2 emissions......................... 245
– interior lights ..................... 182
CODE card ............................. 41
Checking liquid
– control............................... 74
286
– control............................... 75
Direction indicators
– bulb replacement ................ 178
– control............................... 75
Child safety lock ..................... 96
Controls ................................. 85
– Multifunction display ........... 20
Courtesy lights ........................ 76
– Reconfigurable multifunction
display ............................. 21
Child seat assembly
“Universal model” ................ 139
Cruise Control ......................... 79
Cigar lighter ............................ 90
D.R.L. (Daytime Running Lights) 74
3
– bodywork ......................... 221 Dashboard .............................
– engine compartment ........... 222 Dimensions of the car .............. 236
– interiors ............................ 223 Dipped beam headlights
CONTENTS
– bulb replacement........... 178-179
Control buttons ....................... 23
Cleaning and maintenance
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Direction indicators
levels ............. 208-209-210-211
Child seat (compliance for use) .. 141
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Dipped beam headlights
– courtesy lights ................... 83
Display
Door locks ............................. 86
Doors..................................... 95
– child safety lock ................. 95
– emergency rear door
locking device .................... 97
– remote locking/unlocking ... 95
– leather upholstery .............. 224
– bulb replacement ................ 178
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) ... 129
– plastic parts........................ 223
– control............................... 74
DST system............................. 112
Electric sunroof ...................... 92 Fire extinguisher ..................... 91
– list of fuses ......... 191-192-193
Electric windows ..................... 98
Fix&Go Automatic device .......... 169
– replacement ....................... 186
Electromechanical power
assisted steering ................... 121
Fluids and lubricants
(specifications) ............... 242-243
Electronic Q2 (“E-Q2”) ............ 112
Fog lights
Engine
– identification codes.............. 227
– marking ............................ 226
– technical specifications .. 228-229
Engine codes .......................... 227
Engine compartment
– checking fluid levels ............ 207
– opening/closing the bonnet.. 107
– washing ........................... 222
Engine oil
– bulb replacement ................ 178
– control............................... 85
“Follow me home” device......... 76
Front ceiling lights .............
81-82
– bulb replacement ................ 182
Fuel
– fuel cut-off system .............. 86
– how to save fuel ................ 155
Fuel cap ................................ 128
Gearbox use .......................... 154
Getting to know your car ..
3
– bulb replacement ................ 184
GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) ......... 22
STARTING
AND DRIVING
AN
Hazard warning lights ............. 85 INEMERGENCY
Head restraint....................
53-54
– “Anti Whiplash” device ....... 53
Headlight alignment corrector ... 108
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Headlight washers
Fuel reserve ...................... 240-241
– level check ........................ 208
Fuel supply ............................. 230
– checking liquid
level .......... 208-209-210-211
– specifications ..................... 242
Fuse replacement .................... 186
– control............................... 220
Environment (protecting) ......... 129
Fuseboxes (location).. 188-189-190
EOBD system .......................... 121
Fuses
– fuseboxes ........... 188-189-190
SAFETY
Glove compartment light
– consumption ..................... 212
External lights ........................ 74
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Headlights
– alignment corrector ............. 109
CONTENTS
– bulb replacement ................ 177
287
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Headlights .............................. 108
Interiors (cleaning) .................. 222
Menu items ........................... 26
– headlight alignment corrector 108
“Isofix” child seat set-up .......... 143
Mirror courtesy lights ............... 83
– light beam direction ............ 108
Heated rear window
(activation) ....................
Jack...................................... 163
63-72
Hill Holder system.................... 110
How to save fuel .................... 155
STARTING
AND DRIVING
Identification data
– chassis marking ................. 226
IN AN
EMERGENCY
– engine marking ................. 226
– identification data plate ....... 225
– paintwork identification plate 226
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Ignition switch ........................ 49
288
– changing remote
control battery ................... 44
MSR system ........................... 112
Number plate lights
– bulb replacement ................ 181
– key with remote control ....... 42
– key without remote control ... 42
Light clusters
– front light clusters
(changing a bulb) .............. 177
– steering lock ...................... 49
– rear light clusters
(changing a bulb) .............. 179
In an emergency ................ 161
Load limiters .......................... 135
Installing electrical/electronic
devices ................................ 123
Lubricants (specifications) ... 242-243
Installing navigation system
(set-up) ............................... 123
CONTENTS
Keys
– bulb replacement ................ 184
On board instruments ............. 4-5
– engine coolant
temperature gauge .............
6
– fuel level indicator ..............
6
– multifunction display ........... 20
– reconfigurable multifunction
display ............................. 21
– rev counter ........................
6
– speedometer .....................
6
Main beam headlights
– bulb replacement ................ 177
Parking lights (activation) ....... 74
Instrument panel and instruments 4-5
– control............................... 75
Parking the car ....................... 153
Interior fittings......................... 87
Manual climate control system .. 60
Performance (top speeds) ........ 237
Pretensioners ......................... 135
Protecting the environment ....... 129
level .......... 208-209-210-211
Rear window wiper
– seat belts .......................... 131
SBR system ........................... 133
Puddle lights .......................... 84
– blades .............................. 79
Scheduled .............................. 200
– bulb replacement ................ 185
– checking liquid
level .......... 208-209-210-211
Seat belts
– control............................... 77
Quick tyre repair kit “Fix&Go Automatic” ............. 169
– nozzles ............................ 219
Rev counter ...........................
6
RAB system ........................... 112 Reverse lights
– load limiters ...................... 135
– pretensioners ..................... 135
– SBR system........................ 133
Radio transmitters and
mobile phones ...................... 124
Right - hand drive versions 281
– adjusting .....................
50-51
Rim protector ......................... 233
– heating .......................
51-52
– bulb replacement ................ 182
Rear fog lights
– bulb replacement ................ 180
– control............................... 85
Rear view mirrors ..............
Rear window washer
– checking liquid
55-56
Roof bars (set-up) ................... 108
STARTING
AND DRIVING
– using the seat belts ............ 131
– bulb replacement ................ 180
Rear ceiling light ..................... 83
SAFETY
– maintenance ..................... 137
Radio (wiring set-up) ............... 122
Raising the car ....................... 196
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
Seats ..................................... 50
Sensors
Roof rack/ski rack .................. 107
– automatic headlights
(dusk sensor)..................... 74
Safe Lock device ..................... 45
– parking ............................. 124
Safety ................................ 131
– rain................................... 78
– carrying children safely ........ 138
Servicing and maintenance 199
– child safety lock ................. 96
– demanding use of the car .... 206
– “Isofix” child seat
(assembly) ....................... 143
– regular checks ................... 206
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
– scheduled servicing ............. 199
289
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
– scheduled servicing plan ...... 200
Servicing schedule
Storage compartments .......
87-88
– Fix&Go Automatic kit........... 169
Set-up menu .......................... 24
Storing the car ........................ 159
– how to read tyre markings ... 232
Sun visors .............................. 91
– inflation pressures ............... 235
Supplementary heater ............. 73
– rim protector tyre ................ 233
Suspensions ........................... 231
– snow tyres ........................ 158
Symbols ................................ 40
– tyres fitted ........................ 234
Side bag ............................... 148
SAFETY
Side/taillights - dipped beam headlights
– bulb replacement........... 177-179
– control............................... 74
STARTING
AND DRIVING
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Ski compartment .................... 89
Snow chains .......................... 159
Universal Isofix child seat ........ 143
Socket .................................. 90
Technical specifications ..... 225 Using the gearbox ................... 154
Spark plugs (type)................... 228
Third brake light
Speedometer .........................
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
6
Start&Stop system................... 116
Starting the engine ............ 151-161
Starting and driving ......... 151
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Steering ................................ 231
– bulb replacement ................ 181 VDC system ........................... 110
Top speeds.............................. 237 Warning lights on panel ..........
6
Towing the car ........................ 196 Weights............................ 238-239
Towing trailers ........................ 157 Welcome movement ............... 23
Steering lock .......................... 49
Transmission .......................... 230 Wheel rims ............................ 232
Steering wheel adjustment ........ 54
Trip Computer ......................... 36
– dimensions ....................... 234
– Trip Computer parameters .... 37
– reading rim markings .......... 233
– TRIP button ........................ 39
– rim protector ..................... 233
Steering wheel stalks
– left stalk............................ 74
290
– right stalk .......................... 77 Tyres
Wheels and tyres .............. 216-232
– changing a wheel ............... 162
– Fix&Go Automatic kit........... 169
GETTING
TO KNOW
YOUR CAR
– spare wheel ...................... 234
– tyre inflation pressures ........ 235
SAFETY
Window bag .......................... 148
Windows (cleaning) ................ 221
Windscreen wipers
STARTING
AND DRIVING
– blades .............................. 217
– checking liquid
level .......... 208-209-210-211
IN AN
EMERGENCY
– control............................... 77
– nozzles ............................ 219
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
291
PARTS&SERVICES
TECHNICAL SERVICES - SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Print n. 60438300 – 6 Edition – 11/2011
All rights reserved. Reproduction, even partial, without written authorisation
from Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. is prohibited
SERVICE
Cop Alfa Giulietta GB:Alfa 159 cop. LUM GB
15-09-2011
15:08
Pagina 1
ENGLISH
OWNER HANDBOOK
Alfa Services